# Patent

## Title
Tamper resistant dosage forms

## Abstract

The present invention relates to pharmaceutical dosage forms, for example to a tamper resistant dosage form including an opioid analgesic, and processes of manufacture, uses, and methods of treatment thereof.

## Background
The present application is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 14/515,924, filed Oct. 16, 2014, issued as U.S. Pat. No. 9,084,816, which is a continuation of U.S. application Ser. No. 13/803,132, filed Mar. 14, 2013, now abandoned, which is a divisional application of U.S. application Ser. No. 11/844,872, filed Aug. 24, 2007, issued as U.S. Pat. No. 8,894,987, which claims priority from U.S. Provisional Application Ser. No. 60/840,244, filed Aug. 25, 2006. The entire contents of those applications are incorporated herein by reference.


TECHNICAL FIELD OF THE INVENTION
The present invention relates to pharmaceutical dosage forms, for example to a tamper resistant dosage form including an opioid analgesic, and processes of manufacture, uses, and methods of treatment thereof.
BACKGROUND OF THE INVENTION
Pharmaceutical products are sometimes the subject of abuse. For example, a particular dose of opioid agonist may be more potent when administered parenterally as compared to the same dose administered orally. Some formulations can be tampered with to provide the opioid agonist contained therein for illicit use. Controlled release opioid agonist formulations are sometimes crushed, or subject to extraction with solvents (e.g., ethanol) by drug abusers to provide the opioid contained therein for immediate release upon oral or parenteral administration.
Controlled release opioid agonist dosage forms which can liberate a portion of the opioid upon exposure to ethanol, can also result in a patient receiving the dose more rapidly than intended if a patient disregards instructions for use and concomitantly uses alcohol with the dosage form.
There continues to exist a need in the art for pharmaceutical oral dosage forms comprising an opioid agonist without significantly changed opioid release properties when in contact with alcohol and/or with resistance to crushing.
OBJECTS AND SUMMARY OF THE INVENTION
It is an object of certain embodiments of the present invention to provide an oral extended release dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic which is tamper resistant.
It is an object of certain embodiments of the present invention to provide an oral extended release dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic which is resistant to crushing.
It is an object of certain embodiments of the present invention to provide an oral extended release dosage form comprising an active agent such as an opioid analgesic which is resistant to alcohol extraction and dose dumping when concomitantly used with or in contact with alcohol.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can be at least flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and non flattened reference tablet or flattened and non flattened reference multi particulates, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


According to certain such embodiments the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by wt) of the oxycodone hydrochloride.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one active agent;
        (2) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (3) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of less than 1,000,000.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition:
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step of subjecting the extended release matrix formulation to a temperature which is at least the softening temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a time period of at least about 1 minute.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition:
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step wherein said polyethylene oxide at least partially melts.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active agent released at 0.5 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates and the non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active agent released at 0.5 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and non flattened reference tablet or flattened and non flattened reference multi particulates, respectively.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% or 0% ethanol at 37° C., is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent selected from opioid analgesics; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 10 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 85% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 15 mg or 20 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 40 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 65% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 60 mg or 80 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 60% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 8 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 94% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 12 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 92% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 32 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 90% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising a composition comprising at least:

    
    
        (1) at least one active agent selected from opioid analgesics;
        (2) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (3) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements. an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of at least 800,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent selected from opiold analgesics; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent; and
        wherein the extended release matrix formulation when subjected to an indentation test has a cracking force of at least about 110 N.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent; and
        wherein the extended release matrix formulation when subjected to an indentation test has a “penetration depth to crack distance” of at least about 1.0 mm.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a method of treatment wherein a dosage form according to the invention comprising an opioid analgesic is administered for treatment of pain to a patient in need thereof.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to the use of a dosage form according to the invention comprising an opioid analgesic for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of pain.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to the use of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide that has, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, as matrix forming material in the manufacture of a solid extended release oral dosage form comprising an active selected from opioids for imparting to the solid extended release oral dosage form resistance to alcohol extraction.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition;
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step of subjecting the extended release matrix formulation to a temperature which is at least the softening temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a time period of at least 5 minutes.
    
    


According to certain embodiments of the invention the solid extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is for use as a suppository.
The term “extended release” is defined for purposes of the present invention as to refer to products which are formulated to make the drug available over an extended period after ingestion thereby allowing a reduction in dosing frequency compared to a drug presented as a conventional dosage form (e.g. as a solution or an immediate release dosage form).
The term “immediate release” is defined for the purposes of the present invention as to refer to products which are formulated to allow the drug to dissolve in the gastrointestinal contents with no intention of delaying or prolonging the dissolution or absorption of the drug.
The term “solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form” refers to the administration form comprising a unit dose of active agent in extended release form such as an “extended release matrix formulation” and optionally other adjuvants and additives conventional in the art, such as a protective coating or a capsule and the like, and optionally any other additional features or components that are used in the dosage form. Unless specifically indicated the term “solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form” refers to said dosage form in intact form i.e. prior to any tampering. The extended release pharmaceutical dosage form can e.g. be a tablet comprising the extended release matrix formulation or a capsule comprising the extended release matrix formulation in the form of multi particulates. The “extended release pharmaceutical dosage form” may comprise a portion of active agent in extended release form and another portion of active agent in immediate release form, e.g. as an immediate release layer of active agent surrounding the dosage form or an immediate release component included within the dosage form.
The term “extended release matrix formulation” is defined for purposes of the present invention as shaped solid form of a composition comprising at least one active agent and at least one extended release feature such as an extended release matrix material such as e.g. high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. The composition can optionally comprise more than these two compounds namely further active agents and additional retardants and/or other materials, including but not limited to low molecular weight polyethylene oxides and other adjuvants and additives conventional in the art.
The term “bioequivalent/bioequivalence” is defined for the purposes of the present invention to refer to a dosage form that provides geometric mean values of Cmax, AUCt, and AUCinf for an active agent, wherein the 90% confidence intervals estimated for the ratio (test/reference) fall within the range of 80.00% to 125.00%. Preferably, the mean values Cmax, AUCt, and AUCinf fall within the range of 80.00% to 125.00% as determined in both the fed and the fasting states.
The term “polyethylene oxide” is defined for purposes of the present invention as having a molecular weight of at least 25,000, measured as is conventional in the art, and preferably having a molecular weight of at least 100,000. Compositions with lower molecular weight are usually referred to as polyethylene glycols.
The term “high molecular weight polyethylene oxide” is defined for proposes of the present invention as having an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000. For the purpose of this invention the approximate molecular weight is based on rheological measurements. Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 1,000,000 when a 2% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 1, at 10 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 400 to 800 mPa s (cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 2,000,000 when a 2% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 3, at 10 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 2000 to 4000 mPa s (cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 4,000,000 when a 1% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 1650 to 5500 mPa s (cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 5,000,000 when a 1% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 5500 to 7500 mPa s (cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 7,000,000 when a 1% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 7500 to 10,000 mPa s (cP). Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 8,000,000 when a 1% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 10,000 to 15,000 mPa s (cP). Regarding the lower molecular weight polyethylene oxides; Polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 100,000 when a 5% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVT, spindle No. 1, at 50 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 30 to 50 mPa s (cP) and polyethylene oxide is considered to have an approximate molecular weight of 900,000 when a 5% (by wt) aqueous solution of said polyethylene oxide using a Brookfield viscometer Model RVF, spindle No. 2, at 2 rpm, at 25° C. shows a viscosity range of 8800 to 17,600 mPa s (cP).
The term “low molecular weight polyethylene oxide” is defined for purposes of the present invention as having, based on the rheological measurements outlined above, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000.
The term “direct compression” is defined for purposes of the present invention as referring to a tableting process wherein the tablet or any other compressed dosage form is made by a process comprising the steps of dry blending the compounds and compressing the dry blend to form the dosage form, e.g. by using a diffusion blend and/or convection mixing process (e.g. Guidance for Industry, SUPAC-IR/MR: Immediate Release and Modified Release Solid Oral Dosage Forms, Manufacturing Equipment Addendum).
The term “bed of free flowing tablets” is defined for the purposes of the present invention as referring to a batch of tablets that are kept in motion with respect to each other as e.g. in a coating pan set at a suitable rotation speed or in a fluidized bed of tablets. The bed of fire flowing tablets preferably reduces or prevents the sticking of tablets to one another.
The term “flattening” and related terms as used in the context of flattening tablets or other dosage forms in accordance with the present invention means that a tablet is subjected to force applied from a direction substantially perpendicular to the diameter and substantially inline with the thickness of e.g. a tablet. The force may be applied with a carver style bench press (unless expressly mentioned otherwise) to the extent necessary to achieve the target flatness/reduced thickness. According to certain embodiments of the invention the flattening does not result in breaking the tablet in pieces, however, edge spits and cracks may occur. The flatness is described in terms of the thickness of the flattened tablet compared to the thickness of the non-flattened tablet expressed in % thickness, based on the thickness of the non flattened tablet. Apart from tablets, the flattening can be applied to any shape of a dosage form, wherein the force is applied from a direction substantially in line with the smallest diameter (i.e. the thickness) of the shape when the shape is other than spherical and from any direction when the shape is spherical. The flatness is then described in terms of the thickness/smallest diameter of the flattened shape compared to the thickness/smallest diameter of the non-flattened shape expressed in % thickness, based on the thickness/smallest diameter of the non flattened shape, when the initial shape is non spherical, or the % thickness, based on the non flattened diameter when the initial shape is spherical. The thickness is measured using a thickness gauge (e.g., digital thickness gauge or digital caliper) In FIGS. 4 to 6 tablets are shown that where flattened using a carver bench press. The initial shape of the tablets is shown in FIGS. 1 to 3 on the left hand side of the photograph.
In certain embodiments of the invention, apart from using a bench press a hammer can be used for flattening tablets/dosage forms. In such a flattening process hammer strikes are manually applied from a direction substantially inline with the thickness of e.g. the tablet. The flatness is then also described in terms of the thickness/smallest diameter of the flattened shape compared to the non-flattened shape expressed in % thickness, based on the thickness/smallest diameter of the non-flattened shape when the initial shape is non spherical, or the % thickness, based on the non flattened diameter when the initial shape is spherical. The thickness is measured using a thickness gauge (e.g., digital thickness gauge or digital caliper).
By contrast, when conducting the breaking strength or tablet hardness test as described in Remington's Pharmaceutical Sciences, 18 edition, 1990, Chapter 89 “Oral Solid Dosage Forms”, pages 1633-1665, which is incorporated herein by reference, using the Schleuniger Apparatus the tablet/dosage form is put between a pair of flat plates arranged in parallel, and pressed by means of the flat plates, such that the force is applied substantially perpendicular to the thickness and substantially in line with the diameter of the tablet, thereby reducing the diameter in that direction. This reduced diameter is described in terms of % diameter, based on the diameter of the tablet before conducting the breaking strength test. The breaking strength or tablet hardness is defined as the force at which the tested tablet/dosage form breaks. Tablets/dosage forms that do not break, but which are deformed due to the force applied are considered to be break-resistant at that particular force.
A further test to quantify the strength of tablets/dosage forms is the indentation test using a Texture Analyzer, such as the TA-XT2 Texture Analyzer (Texture Technologies Corp., 18 Fairview Road, Scarsdale, N.Y. 10583). In this method, the tablets/dosage forms are placed on top of a stainless stand with slightly concaved surface and subsequently penetrated by the descending probe of the Texture Analyzer, such as a TA-8A 1⁄8 inch diameter stainless steel ball probe. Before starting the measurement, the tablets are aligned directly under the probe, such that the descending probe will penetrate the tablet pivotally, i.e. in the center of the tablet, and such that the force of the descending probe is applied substantially perpendicular to the diameter and substantially in line with the thickness of the tablet. First, the probe of the Texture Analyzer starts to move towards the tablet sample at the pre-test speed. When the probe contacts the tablet surface and the trigger force set is reached, the probe continues its movement with the test speed and penetrates the tablet. For each penetration depth of the probe, which will hereinafter be referred to as “distance”, the corresponding force is measured, and the data are collected. When the probe has reached the desired maximum penetration depth, it changes direction and moves back at the post-test speed, while further data can be collected. The cracking force is defined to be the force of the first local maximum that is reached in the corresponding force/distance diagram and is calculated using for example the Texture Analyzer software “Texture Expert Exceed, Version 2.64 English”. Without wanting to be bound by any theory, it is believed that at this point, some structural damage to the tablet/dosage form occurs in form of cracking. However, the cracked tablets/dosage forms according to certain embodiments of the present invention remain cohesive, as evidenced by the continued resistance to the descending probe. The corresponding distance at the first local maximum is hereinafter referred to as the “penetration depth to crack” distance.
For the purposes of certain embodiments of the present invention, the term “breaking strength” refers to the hardness of the tablets/dosage forms that is preferably measured using the Schleuniger apparatus, whereas the term “cracking force” reflects the strength of the tablets/dosage forms that is preferably measured in the indentation test using a Texture Analyzer.
A further parameter of the extended release matrix formulations that can be derived from the indentation test as described above is the work the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to in an indentation test as described above. The work value corresponds to the integral of the force over the distance.
The term “resistant to crushing” is defined for the purposes of certain embodiments of the present invention as referring to dosage forms that can at least be flattened with a bench press as described above without breaking to no more than about 60% thickness, preferably no more than about 50% thickness, more preferred no more than about 40% thickness, even more preferred no more than about 30% thickness and most preferred no more than about 20% thickness, 10% thickness or 5% thickness.
For the purpose of certain embodiments of the present invention dosage forms are regarded as “resistant to alcohol extraction” when the respective dosage form provides an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours, preferably at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, more preferred at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hour, even more preferred at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours and most preferred at 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points or preferably no more than about 15% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol.
The term “tamper resistant” for the purposes of the present invention refers to dosage forms which at least provide resistance to crushing or resistance to alcohol extraction, preferably both, as defined above and may have further tamper resistant characteristics.
For the purpose of the present invention the term “active agent” is defined as a pharmaceutically active substance which includes without limitation opioid analgesics.
For purposes of the present invention, the term “opioid analgesic” includes single compounds and compositions of compounds selected from the group of opioids and which provide an analgesic effect such as one single opioid agonist or a combination of opioid agonists, one single mixed opioid agonist-antagonist or a combination of mixed opioid agonist-antagonists, or one single partial opioid agonist or a combination of partial opioid agonists and combinations of an opioid agonists, mixed opioid agonist-antagonists and partial opioid agonists with one or more opioid antagonists, stereoisomers, ether or ester, salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, compositions of any of the foregoing, and the like.
The present invention disclosed herein is specifically meant to encompass the use of the opioid analgesic in form of any pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
Pharmaceutically acceptable salts include, but are not limited to, inorganic acid salts such as hydrochloride, hydrobromide, sulfate, phosphate and the like; organic acid salts such as formate, acetate, trifluoroacetate, maleate, tartrate and the like; sulfonates such as methanesulfonate, benzenesulfonate, p-toluenesulfonate, and the like; amino acid salts such as arginate, asparginate, glutamate and the like, and metal salts such as sodium salt, potassium salt, cesium salt and the like; alkaline earth metals such as calcium salt, magnesium salt and the like; organic amine salts such as triethylamine salt, pyridine salt, picoline salt, ethanolamine salt, triethanolamine salt, dicyclohexylamine salt, N,N′-dibenzylethylenediamnine salt and the like.
The opioids used according to the present invention may contain one or more asymmetric centers and may give rise to enantiomers, diastereomers, or other stereoisomeric forms. The present invention is also meant to encompass the use of all such possible forms as well as their racemic and resolved forms and compositions thereof. When the compounds described herein contain olefinic double bonds or other centers of geometric asymmetry, it is intended to include both E and Z geometric isomers. All tautomers are intended to be encompassed by the present invention as well.
As used herein, the term “stereoisomers” is a general term for all isomers of individual molecules that differ only in the orientation of their atoms is space. It includes enantiomers and isomers of compounds with more than one chiral center that are not mirror images of one another (diastereomers).
The term “chiral center” refers to a carbon atom to which four different groups are attached.
The term “enantiomer” or “enantiomeric” refers to a molecule that is nonsuperimposeable on its mirror image and hence optically active wherein the enantiomer rotates the plane of polarized light in one direction and its mirror image rotates the plane of polarized light in the opposite direction.
The term “racemic” refers to a mixture of equal parts of enantiomers and which is optically inactive.
The term “resolution” refers to the separation or concentration or depletion of one of the two enantiomeric forms of a molecule.
Opioid agonists useful in the present invention include, but are not limited to, alfentanil, allylprodine, alphaprodine, anileridine, benzylmorphine, bezitramide, buprenorphine, butorphanol, clonitazene, codeine, desomorphine, dextromoramide, dezocine, diampromide, diamorphone, dihydrocodeine, dihydromorphine, dimenoxadol, dimepheptanol, dimethylthianmbutene, dioxaphetyl butyrate, dipipanone, eptazocine, ethoheptazine, ethylmethylthiambutene, ethylmorphine, etonitazene, etorphine, dihydroetorphine, fentanyl and derivatives, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, hydroxypethidine, isomethadone, ketobemidone, levorphanol, levophenacylmorphan, lofentanil, meperidine, meptazinol, metazocine, methadone, metopon, morphine, myrophine, narceine, nicomorphine, norlevorphanol, normethadone, nalorphine, nalbuphene, normorphine, norpipanone, opium, oxycodone, oxymorphone, papaveretum, pentazocine, phenadoxone, phenomorphan, phenazocine, phenoperidine, piminodine, piritramide, propheptazine, promedol, properidine, propoxyphene, sufentanil, tilidine, tramadol, pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, mixtures of any of the foregoing, and the like.
Opioid antagonists useful in combination with opioid agonists as described above are e.g. naloxone, naltrexone and nalmephene or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, mixtures of any of the foregoing, and the like.
In certain embodiments e.g. a combination of oxycodone HCl and naloxone HCl in a ratio of 2:1 is used.
In certain embodiments, the opioid analgesic is selected from codeine, morphine, oxycodone, hydrocodone, hydromorphone, or oxymorphone or pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates and solvates thereof, mixtures of any of the foregoing, and the like.
In certain embodiments, the opioid analgesic is oxycodone, hydromorphone or oxymorphone or a salt thereof such as e.g. the hydrochloride. The dosage form comprises from about 5 mg to about 500 mg oxycodone hydrochloride, from about 1 mg to about 100 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride or from about 5 mg to about 500 mg oxymorphone hydrochloride. If other salts, derivatives or forms are used, equimolar amounts of any other pharmaceutically acceptable salt or derivative or form including but not limited to hydrates and solvates or the free base may be used. The dosage form comprises e.g. 5 mg, 7.5 mg, 10 mg, 15 mg, 20 mg, 30 mg, 40 mg, 45 mg, 60 mg, or 80 mg, 90 mg, 120 mg or 160 mg oxycodone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts of any other pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative or form including but not limited to hydrates and solvates or of the free base. The dosage form comprises e.g. 5 mg, 7.5 mg, 10 mg, 15 mg, 20 mg, 30, mg, 40 mg, 45 mg, 60 mg, or 80 mg, 90 mg, 120 mg or 160 mg oxymorphone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts of any other pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative or form including but not limited to hydrates and solvates or of the free base. The dosage form comprises e.g. 2 mg, 4 mg, 8 mg, 12 mg, 16 mg, 24 mg, 32 mg, 48 mg or 64 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride or equimolar amounts of any other pharmaceutically acceptable salt, derivative or form including but not limited to hydrates and solvates or of the free base.
WO 2005/097801 A1, U.S. Pat. No. 7,129,248 B2 and US 2006/0173029 A1, all of which are hereby incorporated by reference, describe a process for preparing oxycodone hydrochloride having a 14-hydroxycodeinone level of less than about 25 ppm, preferably of less than about 15 ppm, less than about 10 ppm, or less than about 5 ppm, more preferably of less than about 2 ppm, less than about 1 ppm, less than about 0.5 ppm or less than about 0.25 ppm.
The term “ppm” as used herein means “parts per million”. Regarding 14-hydroxycodeinone, “ppm” means parts per million of 14-hydroxycodeinone in a particular sample product. The 14-hydroxycodeinone level can be determined by any method known in the art, preferably by HPLC analysis using UV detection.
In certain embodiments of the present invention, wherein the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, oxycodone hydrochloride is used having a 14-hydroxycodeinone level of less than about 25 ppm, preferably of less than about 15 ppm, less than about 10 ppm, or less than about 5 ppm, more preferably of less than about 2 ppm, less than about 1 ppm, less than about 0.5 ppm or less than about 0.25 ppm.
In certain other embodiments other therapeutically active agents may be used in accordance with the present invention, either in combination with opioids or instead of opioids. Examples of such therapeutically active agents include antihistamines (e.g., dimenhydrinate, diphenhydramine, chlorpheniramine and dexchlorpheniramine maleate), non-steroidal anti-inflammatory agents (e.g., naproxen, diclofenac, indomethacin, ibuprofen, sulindac, Cox-2 inhibitors) and acetaminophen, anti-emetics (e.g., metoclopramide, methylnaltrexone), anti-epileptics (e.g., phenytoin, meprobmate and nitrazepam), vasodilators (e.g., nifedipine, papaverine, diltiazem and nicardipine), anti-tussive agents and expectorants (e.g. codeine phosphate), anti-asthmatics (e.g. theophylline), antacids, anti-spasmodics (e.g. atropine, scopolamine), antidiabetics (e.g., insulin), diuretics (e.g., ethacrynic acid, bendrofluthiazide), anti-hypotensives (e.g., propranolol, clonidine), antihypertensives (e.g., clonidine, methyldopa), bronchodilatiors (e.g., albuterol), steroids (e.g., hydrocortisone, triamcinolone, prednisone), antibiotics (e.g., tetracycline), antihemorrhoidals, hypnotics, psychotropics, antidiarrheals, mucolytics, sedatives, decongestants (e.g. pseudoephedrine), laxatives, vitamins, stimulants (including appetite suppressants such as phenylpropanolamine) and cannabinoids, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates of the same.
In certain embodiments, the invention is directed to the use of Cox-2 inhibitors as active agents, in combination with opioid analgesics or instead of opioid analgesics, for example the use of Cox-2 inhibitors such as meloxicam (4-hydroxy-2-methyl-N-(5-methyl-2-thiazolyl)-2H-1,2-benzothiazine-3-carboxamide-1,1-dioxide), as disclosed in U.S. Ser. Nos. 10/056,347 and 11/825,938, which are hereby incorporated by reference, nabumetone (4-(6-methoxy-2-naphthyl)-2-butanone), as disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 10/056,348, which is hereby incorporated by reference, celecoxib (4-[5-(4-methylphenyl)-3-(trifluoromethyl)-1H-pyrazol-1-yl]benzenesulfonamide), as disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 11/698,394, which is hereby incorporated by reference, nimesulide (N-(4-Nitro-2-phenoxyphenyl)methanesulfonamide), as disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 10/057,630, which is hereby incorporated by reference, and N-[3-(formylamino)-4-oxo-6-phenoxy-4H-1-benzopyran-7-yl]methanesulfonamide (T-614), as disclosed in U.S. Ser. No. 10/057,632, which is hereby incorporated by reference.
The present invention is also directed to the dosage forms utilizing active agents such as for example, benzodiazepines, barbiturates or amphetamines. These may be combined with the respective antagonists.
The term “benzodiazepines” refers to benzodiazepines and drugs that are derivatives of benzodiazepine that are able to depress the central nervous system. Benzodiazepines include, but are not limited to, alprazolam, bromazepam, chlordiazepoxide, clorazepate, diazepam, estazolan, flurazepam, halazepam, ketazolam, lorazepam, nitrazepam, oxazepam, prazepam, quazepam, tenmazepam, triazolam, methylphenidate as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates and mixtures thereof. Benzodiazepine antagonists that can be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, flumazenil as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates.
Barbiturates refer to sedative-hypnotic drugs derived from barbituric acid (2,4,6,-trioxohexahydropyrimidine). Barbiturates include, but are not limited to, amobarbital, aprobarbotal, butabarbital, butalbital, methohexital, mephobarbital, metharbital, pentobarbital, phenobarbital, secobarbital and as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates mixtures thereof. Barbiturate antagonists that can be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, amphetamines as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates.
Stimulants refer to drugs that stimulate the central nervous system. Stimulants include, but are not limited to, amphetamines, such as amphetamine, dextroamphetamine resin complex, dextroamphetamine, methamphetamine, methylphenidate as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates and mixtures thereof. Stimulant antagonists that can be used in the present invention include, but are not limited to, benzodiazepines, as well as pharmaceutically acceptable salts, hydrates, and solvates as described herein.



BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS
FIG. 1 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of tablets of Example 7.1 before (left side) and after (right side) the breaking strength test using the Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus.
FIG. 2 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of tablets of Example 7.2 before (left side) and after (right side) the breaking strength test using the Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus.
FIG. 3 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of tablets of Example 7.3 before (left side) and after (right side) the breaking strength test using the Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus.
FIG. 4 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.1 after flattening with a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model #3912).
FIG. 5 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.2 after flattening with a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model #3912).
FIG. 6 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.3 after flattening with a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model #3912).
FIG. 7 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.1 after 10 manually conducted hammer strikes.
FIG. 8 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.2 after 10 manually conducted hammer strikes.
FIG. 9 is a photograph that depicts a top view (view is in line with the thickness of the tablet) of a tablet of Example 7.3 after 10 manually conducted hammer strikes.
FIG. 10 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 13.1.
FIG. 11 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 13.2.
FIG. 12 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 13.3.
FIG. 13 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 13.4.
FIG. 14 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 13.5.
FIG. 15 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 14.1.
FIG. 16 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 14.2.
FIG. 17 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 14.3.
FIG. 18 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 14.4.
FIG. 19 is a diagram that depicts the temperature profile of the curing process of Example 14.5.
FIG. 20 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 13.1 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, uncoated).
FIG. 21 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 13.2 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, uncoated).
FIG. 22 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 13.3 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, uncoated).
FIG. 23 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 13.4 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, uncoated).
FIG. 24 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 13.5 tablet (cured for 30 minutes, uncoated).
FIG. 25 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 17.1 tablet (cured for 15 minutes at 72° C., coated).
FIG. 26 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 18.2 tablet (cured for 15 minutes at 72° C., coated).
FIG. 27 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 14.1 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
FIG. 28 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 14.2 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
FIG. 29 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 14.3 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
FIG. 30 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 14.4 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
FIG. 31 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 14.5 tablet (cured for 1 hour, coated).
FIG. 32 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 16.1 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated).
FIG. 33 is a diagram of Example 20 indentation test performed with an Example 16.2 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated).
FIG. 34 is a diagram of Example 21 indentation tests performed with an Example 16.1 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated) and with a commercial OxycontinTM 60 mg tablet.
FIG. 35 is a diagram of Example 21 indentation tests performed with an Example 16.2 tablet (cured for 15 minutes, coated) and with a commercial Oxycontin® 80 mg tablet.
FIG. 36 shows the mean plasma oxycodone concentration versus time profile on linear scale [Population: Full Analysis (Fed State)] according to Example 26.
FIG. 37 shows the mean plasma oxycodone concentration versus time profile on log-linear scale [Population: Full Analysis (Fed State)] according to Example 26.
FIG. 38 shows the mean plasma oxycodone concentration versus time profile on linear scale [Population: Full Analysis (Fasted State)] according to Example 26.
FIG. 39 shows the mean plasma oxycodone concentration versus time profile on log-linear scale [Population: Full Analysis (Fasted State)] according to Example 26.
FIG. 40 shows representative images of crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg and crushed Example 7.2 tablets, according to Example 27.
FIG. 41 shows representative images of milled Example 7.2 and OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets before and after 45 minutes of dissolution, according to Example 27.
FIG. 42 shows dissolution profiles of milled Example 7.2 tablets and crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets, according to Example 27.
FIG. 43 shows particle size distribution graphs of milled tablets (OxyContinTM 10 mg, Example 7.2 and Example 14.5 tablets), according to Example 27.



DETAILED DESCRIPTION
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition;
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step of subjecting the extended release matrix formulation to a temperature which is at least the softening temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a time period of at least about 1 minute.

Preferably, the curing is conducted at atmospheric pressure.

    
    


In a certain embodiment the present invention concerns a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition;
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step of subjecting the extended release matrix formulation to a temperature which is at least the softening temperature of said polyethylene oxide for a time period of at least 5 minutes. Preferably, the curing is conducted at atmospheric pressure.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a process of preparing a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form,

    comprising at least the steps of:
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition;
        
        
        (b) shaping the composition to form an extended release matrix formulation; and
        (c) curing said extended release matrix formulation comprising at least a curing step wherein said polyethylene oxide at least partially melts.

Preferably, the curing is conducted at atmospheric pressure.

    
    


In certain embodiments the composition is shaped in step b) to form an extended release matrix formulation in the form of tablet. For shaping the extended release matrix formulation in the form of tablet a direct compression process can be used. Direct compression is an efficient and simple process for shaping tablets by avoiding process steps like wet granulation. However, any other process for manufacturing tablets as known in the art may be used, such as wet granulation and subsequent compression of the granules to form tablets.
In one embodiment, the curing of the extended release matrix formulation in step c) comprises at least a curing step wherein the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release matrix formulation at least partially melts. For example, at least about 20% or at least about 30% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release matrix formulation melts. Preferably, at least about 40% or at least about 50%, more preferably at least about 60%, at least about 75% or at least about 90% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release matrix formulation melts. In a preferred embodiment, about 100% of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide melts.
In other embodiments, the curing of the extended release matrix formulation in step c) comprises at least a curing step wherein the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to an elevated temperature for a certain period of time. In such embodiments, the temperature employed in step c), i.e. the curing temperature, is at least as high as the softening temperature of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. Without wanting to be bound to any theory it is believed that the curing at a temperature that is at least as high as the softening temperature of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide causes the polyethylene oxide particles to at least adhere to each other or even to fuse. According to some embodiments the curing temperature is at least about 60° C. or at least about 62° C. or ranges from about 62° C. to about 90° C. or from about 62° C. to about 85° C. or from about 62° C. to about 80° C. or from about 65° C. to about 90° C. or from about 65° C. to about 85° C. or from about 65° C. to about 80° C. The curing temperature preferably ranges from about 68° C. to about 90° C. or from about 68° C. to about 85° C. or from about 68° C. to about 80° C. more preferably from about 70° C. to about 90° C. or from about 70° C. to about 85° C. or from about 70° C. to about 80° C., most preferably from about 72° C. to about 90° C. or from about 72° C. to about 85° C. or from about 72° C. to about 80° C. The curing temperature may be at least about 60° C. or at least about 62° C., but less than about 90° C. or less than about 80° C. Preferably, it is in the range of from about 62° C. to about 72° C., in particular from about 68° C. to about 72° C. Preferably, the curing temperature is at least as high as the lower limit of the softening temperature range of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide or at least about 62° C. or at least about 68° C. More preferably, the curing temperature is within the softening temperature range of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide or at least about 70° C. Even more preferably, the curing temperature is at least as high as the upper limit of the softening temperature range of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide or at least about 72° C. In an alternative embodiment, the curing temperature is higher than the upper limit of the softening temperature range of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example the curing temperature is at least about 75° C. or at least about 80° C.
In those embodiments where the curing of the extended release matrix formulation in step c) comprises at least a curing step wherein the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to an elevated temperature for a certain period of time, this period of time is hereinafter referred to as the curing time. For the measurement of the curing time a starting point and an end point of the curing step is defined. For the purposes of the present invention, the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the curing temperature is reached.
In certain embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form between the starting point and the end point of the curing. In such embodiments the end point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced, e.g. by terminating or reducing the heating and/or by starting a subsequent cooling step, and the temperature subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C. When the curing temperature is reached and the curing step is thus started, deviations from the curing temperature in the course of the curing step can occur. Such deviations are tolerated as long as they do not exceed a value of about ±10° C., preferably about ±6° C., and more preferably about ±3° C. For example, if a curing temperature of at least about 75° C. is to be maintained, the measured temperature may temporarily increase to a value of about 85° C., preferably about 81° C. and more preferably about 78° C. and the measured temperature may also temporarily drop down to a value of about 65° C., preferably about 69° C. and more preferably about 72° C. In the cases of a larger decrease of the temperature and/or in the case that the temperature drops below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C. the curing step is discontinued, i.e. an end point is reached. Curing can be restarted by again reaching the curing temperature.
In other embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a parabolic or triangular form between the starting point and the end point of the curing. This means that after the starting point, i.e. the point in time when the curing temperature is reached, the temperature further increases to reach a maximum, and then decreases. In such embodiments, the end point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the temperature drops below the curing temperature.
In this context, it has to be noted that depending on the apparatus used for the curing, which will hereinafter be called curing device, different kinds of temperatures within the curing device can be measured to characterize the curing temperature.
In certain embodiments, the curing step may take place in an oven. In such embodiments, the temperature inside the oven is measured. Based thereon, when the curing step takes place in an oven, the curing temperature is defined to be the target inside temperature of the oven and the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the inside temperature of the oven reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined to be (1) the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced and the temperature inside the oven subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C., in a plateau-like temperature profile or (2) the point in time when the temperature inside the oven drops below the curing temperature in a parabolic or triangular temperature profile. Preferably, the curing step starts when the temperature inside the oven reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., more preferably of at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. In preferred embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form, wherein the curing temperature, i.e. the inside temperature of the oven, is preferably at least about 68° C., for example about 70° C. or about 72° C. or about 73° C., or lies within a range of from about 70° C. to about 75° C., and the curing time is preferably in the range of from about 30 minutes to about 20 hours, more preferably from about 30 minutes to about 15 hours, or from about 30 minutes to about 4 hours or from about 30 minutes to about 2 hours. Most preferably, the curing time is in the range of from about 30 minutes to about 90 minutes.
In certain other embodiments, the curing takes place in curing devices that are heated by an air flow and comprise a heated air supply (inlet) and an exhaust, like for example a coating pan or fluidized bed. Such curing devices will hereinafter be called convection curing devices. In such curing devices, it is possible to measure the temperature of the inlet air, i.e. the temperature of the heated air entering the convection curing device and/or the temperature of the exhaust air, i.e. the temperature of the air leaving the convection curing device. It is also possible to determine or at least estimate the temperature of the formulations inside the convection curing device during the curing step, e.g. by using infrared temperature measurement instruments, such as an IR gun, or by measuring the temperature using a temperature probe that was placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations. Based thereon, when the curing step takes place in a convection curing device, the curing temperature can be defined and the curing time can be measured as the following.
In one embodiment, wherein the curing time is measured according to method 1, the curing temperature is defined to be the target inlet air temperature and the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the inlet air temperature reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined to be (1) the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced and the inlet air temperature subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C., in a plateau-like temperature profile or (2) the point in time when the inlet air temperature drops below the curing temperature in a parabolic or triangular temperature profile. Preferably, the curing step starts according to method 1, when the inlet air temperature reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., more preferably, of at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. In a preferred embodiment, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form, wherein the curing temperature, i.e. the target inlet air temperature, is preferably at least about 72° C., for example about 75° C., and the curing time which is measured according to method 1 is preferably in the range of from about 15 minutes to about 2 hours, for example about 30 minutes or about 1 hour.
In another embodiment, wherein the curing time is measured according to method 2, the curing temperature is defined to be the target exhaust air temperature and the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the exhaust air temperature reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined to be (1) the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced and the exhaust air temperature subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C., in a plateau-like temperature profile or (2) the point in time when the exhaust air temperature drops below the curing temperature in a parabolic or triangular temperature profile. Preferably, the curing step starts according to method 2, when the exhaust air temperature reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., more preferably, of at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. In preferred embodiments, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form, wherein the curing temperature, i.e. the target exhaust air temperature, is preferably at least about 68° C., at least about 70° C. or at least about 72° C., for example the target exhaust air temperature is about 68° C., about 70° C., about 72° C., about 75° C. or about 78° C., and the curing time which is measured according to method 2 is preferably in the range of from about 1 minute to about 2 hours, preferably from about 5 minutes to about 90 minutes, for example the curing time is about 5 minutes, about 10 minutes, about 15 minutes, about 30 minutes, about 60 minutes, about 70 minutes, about 75 minutes or about 90 minutes. In a more preferred embodiment, the curing time which is measured according to method 2 is in the range of from about 15 minutes to about 1 hour.
In a further embodiment, wherein the curing time is measured according to method 3, the curing temperature is defined to be the target temperature of the extended release matrix formulations and the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the temperature of the extended release matrix formulations, which can be measured for example by an IR gun, reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined to be (1) the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced and the temperature of the extended release matrix formulations subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C. in a plateau-like temperature profile or (2) the point in time when the temperature of the extended release matrix formulations drops below the curing temperature in a parabolic or triangular temperature profile. Preferably, the curing step starts according to method 3, when the temperature of the extended release matrix formulations reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., more preferably, of at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C.
In still another embodiment, wherein the curing time is measured according to method 4, the curing temperature is defined to be the target temperature measured using a temperature probe, such as a wire thermocouple, that was placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations and the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the temperature measured using a temperature probe that was placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations reaches the curing temperature. The end point of the curing step is defined to be (1) the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced and the temperature measured using the temperature probe subsequently drops below the curing temperature by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C., in a plateau-like temperature profile or (2) the point in time when the temperature measured using the temperature probe drops below the curing temperature in a parabolic or triangular temperature profile. Preferably, the curing step starts according to method 4, when the temperature measured using a temperature probe that was placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations reaches a curing temperature of at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., more preferably, of at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. In a preferred embodiment, the temperature profile during the curing step shows a plateau-like form, wherein the curing temperature, i.e. the target temperature measured using a temperature probe that was placed inside the curing device near the extended release matrix formulations, is preferably at least about 68° C., for example it is about 70° C., and the curing time which is measured according to method 4 is preferably in the range of from about 15 minutes to about 2 hours, for example the curing time is about 60 minutes or about 90 minutes.
If curing takes place in a convection curing device, the curing time can be measured by any one of methods 1, 2, 3 or 4. In a preferred embodiment, the curing time is measured according to method 2.
In certain embodiments, the curing temperature is defined as a target temperature range, for example the curing temperature is defined as a target inlet air temperature range or a target exhaust air temperature range. In such embodiments, the starting point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the lower limit of the target temperature range is reached, and the end point of the curing step is defined to be the point in time when the heating is stopped or at least reduced, and the temperature subsequently drops below the lower limit of the target temperature range by more than about 10° C. and/or below the lower limit of the softening temperature range of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, for example below about 62° C.
The curing time, i.e. the time period the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to the curing temperature, which can for example be measured according to methods 1, 2, 3 and 4 as described above, is at least about 1 minute or at least about 5 minutes. The curing time may vary from about 1 minute to about 24 hours or from about 5 minutes to about 20 hours or from about 10 minutes to about 15 hours or from about 15 minutes to about 10 hours or from about 30 minutes to about 5 hours depending on the specific composition and on the formulation and the curing temperature. The parameter of the composition, the curing time and the curing temperature are chosen to achieve the tamper resistance as described herein. According to certain embodiments the curing time varies from about 15 minutes to about 30 minutes. According to further embodiments wherein the curing temperature is at least about 60° C. or at least about 62° C., preferably at least about 68° C., at least about 70° C., at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. or varies from about 62° C. to about 85° C. or from about 65° C. to about 85° C. the curing time is preferably at least about 15 minutes, at least about 30 minutes, at least about 60 minutes, at least about 75 minutes, at least about 90 minutes or about 120 minutes. In preferred embodiments, wherein the curing temperature is for example at least about 62° C., at least about 68° C. or at least about 70° C., preferably at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C., or ranges from about 62° C. to about 80° C. from about 65° C. to about 80° C. from about 68° C. to about 80° C., from about 70° C. to about 80° C. or from about 72° C. to about 80° C., the curing time is preferably at least about 1 minute or at least about 5 minutes. More preferably, the curing time is at least about 10 minutes, at least about 15 minutes or at least about 30 minutes. In certain such embodiments, the curing time can be chosen to be as short as possible while still achieving the desired tamper resistance. For example, the curing time preferably does not exceed about 5 hours, more preferably it does not exceed about 3 hours and most preferably it does not exceed about 2 hours. Preferably, the curing time is in the range of from about 1 minute to about 5 hours, from about 5 minutes to about 3 hours, from about 15 minutes to about 2 hours or from about 15 minutes to about 1 hour. Any combination of the curing temperatures and the curing times as disclosed herein lies within the scope of the present invention.
In certain embodiments, the composition is only subjected to the curing temperature until the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide present in the extended release matrix formulation has reached its softening temperature and/or at least partially melts. In certain such embodiments, the curing time may be less than about 5 minutes, for example the curing time may vary from about 0 minutes to about 3 hours or from about 1 minute to about 2 hours or from about 2 minutes to about 1 hour. Instant curing is possible by choosing a curing device which allows for an instant heating of the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in the extended release matrix formulation to at least its softening temperature, so that the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide at least partially melts. Such curing devices are for example microwave ovens, ultrasound devices, light irradiation apparatus such as UV-irradiation apparatus, ultra-high frequency (UHF) fields or any method known to the person skilled in the art.
The skilled person is aware that the size of the extended release matrix formulation may determine the required curing time and curing temperature to achieve the desired tamper resistance. Without wanting to be bound by any theory, it is believed that in the case of a large extended release matrix formulation, such as a large tablet, a longer curing time is necessary to conduct the heat into the interior of the formulation than in the case of a corresponding formulation with smaller size. Higher temperature increases the thermal conductivity rate and thereby decreases the required curing time.
The curing step c) may take place in an oven. Advantageously, the curing step c) takes place in a bed of free flowing extended release matrix formulations as e.g. in a coating pan. The coating pan allows an efficient batch wise curing step which can subsequently be followed by a coating step without the need to transfer the dosage forms, e.g. the tablets. Such a process may comprise the steps of:

    
    
        (a) combining at least
        
            (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, and
            (2) at least one active agent,
            to form a composition;
        
        
        (b) shaping said composition to form the extended release matrix formulation in the form of a tablet by direct compression;
        (c) curing said tablet by
        
            subjecting a bed of free flowing tablets to a temperature from about 62° C. to about 90° C., preferably from about 70° C. to about 90° C. for a time period of at least about 1 minute or at least about 5 minutes, preferably of at least about 30 minutes, in a coating pan and
            subsequently cooling the bed of free flowing tablets to a temperature of below about 50° C.;
            and subsequently
        
        
        (d) coating the dosage form in said coating pan.
    
    


In certain embodiments, an additional curing step can follow after step d) of coating the dosage form. An additional curing step can be performed as described for curing step c). In certain such embodiments, the curing temperature of the additional curing step is preferably at least about 70° C., at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C., and the curing time is preferably in the range of from about 15 minutes to about 1 hour, for example about 30 minutes.
In certain embodiments an antioxidant, e.g. BHT (butylated hydroxytoluene) is added to the composition.
In certain embodiments, the curing step c) leads to a decrease in the density of the extended release matrix formulation, such that the density of the cured extended release matrix formulation is lower than the density of the extended release matrix formulation prior to the curing step c). Preferably, the density of the cured extended release matrix formulation in comparison to the density of the uncured extended release matrix formulation decreases by at least about 0.5%. More preferably, the density of the cured extended release matrix formulation in comparison to the density of the uncured extended release matrix formulation decreases by at least about 0.7%, at least about 0.8%, at least about 1.0%, at least about 2.0% or at least about 2.5%. Without wanting to be bound by any theory, it is believed that the extended release matrix formulation, due to the absence of elevated pressure during the curing step c), expands, resulting in a density decrease.
According to a further aspect of the invention, the density of the extended release matrix formulation in the solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form, preferably in a dosage form containing oxycodone HCl as active agent, is equal to or less than about 1.20 g/cm3. Preferably, it is equal to or less than about 1.19 g/cm3, equal to or less than about 1.18 g/cm3, or equal to or less than about 1.17 g/cm3. For example, the density of the extended release matrix formulation is in the range of from about 1.10 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3. Preferably it is in the range of from about 1.12 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3 or from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3, more preferably from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.18 g/cm3.
The density of the extended release matrix formulation is preferably determined by Archimedes Principle using a liquid of known density (ρ0). The extended release matrix formulation is first weighed in air and then immersed in a liquid and weighed. From these two weights, the density of the extended release matrix formulation ρ can be determined by the equation:




  ρ
  =
  
    
      A
      
        A
        -
        B
      
    
    ·
    
      ρ
      0
    
  




wherein ρ is the density of the extended release matrix formulation, A is the weight of the extended release matrix formulation in air, B is the weight of the extended release matrix formulation when immersed in a liquid and ρ0 is the density of the liquid at a given temperature. A suitable liquid of known density ρ0 is for example hexane.

Preferably, the density of an extended release matrix formulation is measured using a Top-loading Mettler Toledo balance Model #AB 135-S/FACT, Serial #1127430072 and a density determination kit 33360. Preferably, hexane is used as liquid of known density ρ0.
The density values throughout this document correspond to the density of the extended release matrix formulation at mom temperature.
The density of the extended release matrix formulation preferably refers to the density of the uncoated formulation, for example to the density of a core tablet. In those embodiments, wherein the extended release matrix formulation is coated, for example wherein the extended release matrix formulation is subjected to a coating step d) after the curing step c), the density of the extended release matrix formulation is preferably measured prior to performing the coating step, or by removing the coating from a coated extended release matrix formulation and subsequently measuring the density of the uncoated extended release matrix formulation.
In the above described embodiments high molecular weight polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of from 2,000,000 to 15,000,000 or from 2,000,000 to 8,000,000 may be used. In particular polyethylene oxides having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of 2,000,000, 4,000,000, 7,000,000 or 8,000,000 may be used. In particular polyethylene oxides having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of 4,000,000, may be used.
In embodiments wherein the composition further comprises at least one low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is used polyethylene oxides having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000, such as polyethylene oxides having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of from 100,000 to 900,000 may be used. The addition of such low molecular weight polyethylene oxides may be used to specifically tailor the release rate such as enhance the release rate of a formulation that otherwise provides a release rate to slow for the specific purpose. In such embodiments at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of 100,000 may be used.
In certain such embodiments the composition comprises at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000 and at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000, wherein the composition comprises at least about 10% (by wt) or at least about 20% (by wt) of the polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000. In certain such embodiments the curing temperature is less than about 80° C. or even less than about 77° C.
In certain embodiments the overall content of polyethylene oxide in the composition is at least about 80% (by wt). Without wanting to be bound to any theory it is believed that high contents of polyethylene oxide provide for the tamper resistance as described herein, such as the breaking strength and the resistance to alcohol extraction. According to certain such embodiments the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by wt) of the oxycodone hydrochloride.
In certain such embodiments the content in the composition of the at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000 is at least about 80% (by wt). In certain embodiments the content in the composition of the at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000 is at least about 85% or at least about 90% (by wt). In such embodiments a polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 4,000,000 or at least 7,000,000 may be employed. In certain such embodiments the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride, although other active agents can also be used according to this aspect of the invention, and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by wt) oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride.
In certain embodiments wherein the amount of drug in the composition is at least about 20% (by wt) the polyethylene oxide content may be as low as about 75% (by wt). In another embodiment, wherein the amount of drug in the composition is in the range of from about 25% (by wt) to about 35% (by wt), the polyethylene oxide content may be in the range of from about 65% (by wt) to about 75% (by wt). For example, in embodiments wherein the amount of drug in the composition is about 32% (by wt) the polyethylene oxide content may be about 67% (by wt).
In certain embodiments of the invention magnesium stearate is added during or after the curing process/curing step in order to avoid that the tablets stick together. In certain such embodiments the magnesium stearate is added at the end of the curing process/curing step before cooling the tablets or during the cooling of the tablets. Other anti-tacking agents that could be used would be talc, silica, fumed silica, colloidal silica dioxide, calcium stearate, carnauba wax, long chain fatty alcohols and waxes, such as stearic acid and stearyl alcohol, mineral oil, paraffin, micro crystalline cellulose, glycerin, propylene glycol, and polyethylene glycol. Additionally or alternatively the coating can be started at the high temperature.
In certain embodiments, wherein curing step c) is carried out in a coating pan, sticking of tablets can be avoided or sticking tablets can be separated by increasing the pan speed during the curing step or after the curing step, in the latter case for example before or during the cooling of the tablets. The pan speed is increased up to a speed where all tablets are separated or no sticking occurs.
In certain embodiments of the invention, an initial film coating or a fraction of a film coating is applied prior to performing curing step c). This film coating provides an “overcoat” for the extended release matrix formulations or tablets to function as an anti-tacking agent, i.e. in order to avoid that the formulations or tablets stick together. In certain such embodiments the film coating which is applied prior to the curing step is an Opadry film coating. After the curing step c), a further film coating step can be performed.
The present invention encompasses also any solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form obtainable by a process according to any process as described above.
Independently, the present invention is also directed to solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage forms.
In certain embodiments the invention is directed to solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage forms comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates.
In certain such embodiments the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points or no more than about 15% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates and the non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
    
    


In certain such embodiments, the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates and the non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 5 and about 30% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 5 and about 20% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 10 and about 18% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
In certain embodiments the invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points at each time point from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and non flattened reference tablet or flattened and non flattened reference multi particulates, respectively.
In certain such embodiments the tablet or the multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60%, or no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the individual multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points or no more than about 15% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and a non flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates, respectively.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation comprising an active agent in the form of a tablet or multi particulates,

    
    
        wherein the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% or 0% ethanol at 37° C., is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
    
    


In certain such embodiments, the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% or 0% ethanol at 37° C. is between about 5 and about 40% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 5 and about 30% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 5 and about 20% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours or is between about 10 and about 18% (by wt) active agent released after 0.5 hours.
Such dosage forms may be prepared as described above.
In certain embodiments the invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising a composition comprising at least:

    
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent, preferably selected from opioid analgesics; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide. The composition may also comprise at least about 85 or 90% (by wt) polyethylene oxide. According to certain such embodiments wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by wt) of the oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride.
    
    


In certain such embodiments the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 10 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 85% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 15 mg or 20 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 40 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 65% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 60 mg or 80 mg oxycodone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 60% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 8 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 94% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 12 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 92% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) 32 mg hydromorphone hydrochloride; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 90% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising a composition comprising at least:

    
    
        (1) at least one active agent, preferably selected from opioid analgesics;
        (2) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (3) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000. In certain such embodiments the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) of polyethylene oxide. The composition may also comprise at least about 85 or 90% (by wt) polyethylene oxide. According to certain such embodiments wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide, the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride and the composition comprises more than about 5% (by wt) of the oxycodone hydrochloride or the hydromorphone hydrochloride. The composition may also comprise 15 to 30% (by wt) of polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and 65 to 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of less than 1,000,000, or the composition may comprise at least about 20% (by wt) or at least about 30% (by wt) or at least about 50% (by wt) of polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of at least 1,000,000.
    
    


In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, a molecular weight of at least 800,000 or at least 900,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent selected from opioid analgesics; and
        wherein the composition comprises at least about 80% (by wt) polyethylene oxide.
    
    


In certain embodiments of the invention the extended release matrix has a density which is equal to or less than about 1.20 g/cm3. In certain such embodiments, the density of the extended release matrix formulation is equal to or less than about 1.19 g/cm3, preferably equal to or less than about 1.18 g/cm3 or equal to or less than about 1.17 g/cm3. For example, the density of the extended release matrix formulation is in the range of from about 1.10 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.20 g/cm3, or from about 1.11 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3. Preferably it is in the range of from about 1.12 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3 or from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.19 g/cm3, more preferably from about 1.13 g/cm3 to about 1.18 g/cm3. Preferably, the density is determined by Archimedes principle, as described above.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent; and
        wherein the extended release matrix formulation when subjected to an indentation test has a cracking force of at least about 110 N.
    
    


In certain embodiments of the invention the extended release matrix formulation has a cracking force of at least about 110 N, preferably of at least about 120 N, at least about 130 N or at least about 140 N, more preferably of at least about 150 N, at least about 160 N or at least about 170 N, most preferably of at least about 180 N, at least about 190 N or at least about 200 N.
In certain embodiments, the present invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, the extended release matrix formulation comprising

    a composition comprising at least:
    
        (1) at least one polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000; and
        (2) at least one active agent; and
        wherein the extended release matrix formulation when subjected to an indentation test has a “penetration depth to crack distance” of at least about 1.0 mm.
    
    


In certain embodiments of the invention the extended release matrix formulation has a “penetration depth to crack” distance of at least about 1.0 mm or at least about 1.2 mm, preferably of at least about 1.4 mm, at least about 1.5 mm or at least about 1.6 mm, more preferably of at least about 1.8 mm, at least about 1.9 mm or at least about 2.0 mm, most preferably of at least about 2.2 mm, at least about 2.4 mm or at least about 2.6 mm.
In certain such embodiments of the invention the extended release matrix formulation has a cracking force of at least about 110 N, preferably of at least about 120 N, at least about 130 N or at least about 140 N, more preferably of at least about 150 N, at least about 160 N or at least about 170 N, most preferably of at least about 180 N, at least about 190 N or at least about 200 N, and/or a “penetration depth to crack” distance of at least about 1.0 mm or at least about 1.2 mm, preferably of at least about 1.4 mm, at least about 1.5 mm or at least about 1.6 mm, more preferably of at least about 1.8 mm, at least about 1.9 mm or at least about 2.0 mm, most preferably of at least about 2.2 mm, at least about 2.4 mm or at least about 2.6 mm. A combination of any of the aforementioned values of cracking force and “penetration depth to crack” distance is included in the scope of the present invention.
In certain such embodiments the extended release matrix formulation when subjected to an indentation test resists a work of at least about 0.06 J or at least about 0.08 J, preferably of at least about 0.09 J, at least about 0.11 J or at least about 0.13 J, more preferably of at least about 0.15 J, at least about 0.17 J or at least about 0.19 J, most preferably of at least about 0.21 J, at least about 0.23 J or at least about 0.25 J, without cracking.
The parameters “cracking force”, “penetration depth to crack distance” and “work” are determined in an indentation test as described above, using a Texture Analyzer such as the TA-XT2 Texture Analyzer (Texture Technologies Corp., 18 Fairview Road, Scarsdale, N.Y. 10583). The cracking force and/or “penetration depth to crack” distance can be determined using an uncoated or a coated extended release matrix formulation. Preferably, the cracking force and/or “penetration depth to crack” distance are determined on the uncoated extended release matrix formulation. Without wanting to be bound by any theory, it is believed that a coating, such as the coating applied in step d) of the manufacturing process of the solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form as described above, does not significantly contribute to the observed cracking force and/or “penetration depth to crack” distance. Therefore, the cracking force and/or “penetration depth to crack” distance determined for a specific coated extended release matrix formulation are not expected to vary substantially from the values determined for the corresponding uncoated extended release matrix formulation.
In certain embodiments the extended release matrix formulation is in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, and the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening. Preferably, the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening.
Preferably, the flattening of the tablets or the individual multi particulates is performed with a bench press, such as a carver style bench press, or with a hammer, as described above.
In certain such embodiments the extended release matrix formulation is in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, and the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates. Preferably, the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein said flattened tablet or the flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points or no more than about 15% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a non-flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates.
In certain embodiments the invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form comprising an extended release matrix formulation, wherein the extended release matrix formulation is in the form of a tablet or multi particulates, and the tablet or the individual multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or of the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the flattened or non flattened multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C., characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5.0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points at each time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and non flattened reference tablet or flattened and non flattened reference multi particulates, respectively. Preferably, the tablet or the multi particulates can at least be flattened without breaking, characterized by a thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate after the flattening which corresponds to no more than about 60%, or no more than about 50%, or no more than about 40%, or no more than about 30%, or no more than about 20%, or no more than about 16% of the thickness of the tablet or the individual multi particulate before flattening, and wherein the flattened or non flattened tablet or the individual multi particulates provide an in-vitro dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) comprising 40% ethanol at 37° C. characterized by the percent amount of active released at 0.5 hours or at 0.5 and 0.75 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75 and 1 hours, or at 0.5, 0.75, 1 and 1.5 hours or at 0.5, 0.75, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 20% points or no more than about 15% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. without ethanol, using a flattened and a non flattened reference tablet or reference multi particulates, respectively.
In certain such embodiments the extended release matrix formulation, when subjected to a maximum force of about 196 N or about 439 N in a tablet hardness test, does not break.
Preferably, the tablet hardness test to determine the breaking strength of extended release matrix formulations is performed in a Schleuniger Apparatus as described above. For example, the breaking strength is determined using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus and applying a force of a maximum of about 196 N, or a Schleuniger Model 6D Apparatus and applying a force of a maximum of about 439 N.
It has also been observed that formulations of the present invention are storage stable, wherein the extended release matrix formulation after having been stored at 25° C. and 60% relative humidity (RH) or 40° C. and 75% relative humidity (RH) for at least 1 month, more preferably for at least 2 months, for at least 3 months or for at least 6 months, provides a dissolution rate, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. characterized by the percent amount of active released at 1 hours or at 1 and 2 hours, or at 1 and 4 hours, or at 1, 2 and 4 hours, or at 1, 4 and 12 hours, or at 1, 2, 4 and 8 hours or at 1, 2, 4, 8 and 12 hours of dissolution that deviates no more than about 15% points, preferably no more than about 12% points or no more than about 10% points, more preferably no more than about 8% points or no more than about 6% points, most preferably no more than about 5% points at each of said time points from the corresponding in-vitro dissolution rate of a reference formulation prior to storage. Preferably, the extended release matrix formulation is stored in count bottles, such as 100 count bottles. Any combination of the aforementioned storage times, dissolution time points and deviation limits lies within the scope of the present invention.
According to a further storage stability aspect the extended release matrix formulation after having been stored at 25° C. and 60% relative humidity (RH) or at 40° C. and 75% relative humidity (RH) for at least 1 month, more preferably for at least 2 months, for at least 3 months or for at least 6 months, contains an amount of the at least one active agent in % (by wt) relative to the label claim of the active agent for the extended release matrix formulation that deviates no more than about 10% points, preferably no more than about 8% points or no more than about 6% points, more preferably no more than about 5% points or no more than about 4% points or no more than about 3% points from the corresponding amount of active agent in % (by wt) relative to the label claim of the active agent for the extended release matrix formulation of a reference formulation prior to storage. Preferably, the extended release matrix formulation is stored in count bottles, such as 100 count bottles. Any combination of the aforementioned storage times and deviation limits lies within the scope of the present invention.
According to certain such embodiments the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride.
Preferably, the amount of the at least one active agent in % (by wt) relative to the label claim of the active agent for the extended release matrix formulation is determined by extracting the at least one active agent from the extended release matrix formulation and subsequent analysis using high performance liquid chromatography. In certain embodiments, wherein the at least one active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride, preferably the amount of oxycodone hydrochloride in % (by wt) relative to the label claim of oxycodone hydrochloride for the extended release matrix formulation is determined by extracting the oxycodone hydrochloride from the extended release matrix formulation with a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring until the extended release matrix formulation is completely dispersed or for overnight and subsequent analysis using high performance liquid chromatography, preferably reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography. In certain such embodiments, wherein the extended release matrix formulation is in the form of tablets, preferably the amount of oxycodone hydrochloride in % (by wt) relative to the label claim of oxycodone hydrochloride for the tablets is determined by extracting oxycodone hydrochloride from two sets of ten tablets each with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring until the tablets are completely dispersed or for overnight and subsequent analysis using high performance liquid chromatography, preferably reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography. Preferably, the assay results are mean values on two measurements.
In certain embodiments the invention is directed to a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form wherein the dosage form provides a dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., is between 12.5 and 55% (by wt) active agent released after 1 hour, between 25 and 65% (by wt) active agent released after 2 hours, between 45 and 85% (by wt) active agent released after 4 hours and between 55 and 95% (by wt) active agent released after 6 hours, and optionally between 75 and 100% (by wt) active agent released after 8 hours. Preferably, the dosage form provides a dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., between 15 and 45% (by wt) active released after 1 hour, is between 30 and 60% (by wt) active agent released after 2 hours, between 50 and 80% (by wt) active agent released after 4 hours and between 60 and 90% (by wt) active agent released after 6 hours and optionally between 80 and 100% (by wt) active agent released after 8 hours. More preferably, the dosage form provides a dissolution rate, which when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 nil simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., is between 17.5 and 35% (by wt) active agent released after 1 hour, between 35 and 55% (by wt) active agent released after 2 hours, between 55 and 75% (by wt) active agent released after 4 hours and between 65 and 85% (by wt) active agent released after 6 hours and optionally between 85 and 100% (by wt) active agent released after 8 hours.
In certain such embodiments the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride or hydromorphone hydrochloride.
Such dosage forms may be prepared by the process as described herein.
In embodiments as described above the tablet may be formed by direct compression of the composition and cured by at least subjecting said tablet to a temperature of at least about 60° C. at least about 62° C. at least about 68° C., at least about 70° C., at least about 72° C. or at least about 75° C. for a time period of at least about 1 minute, at least about 5 minutes or at least about 15 minutes.
In certain embodiments of the invention the tablet as described above may be over coated with a polyethylene oxide powder layer by applying to the cured or uncured tablet a powder layer of polyethylene oxide surrounding the core and cure the powder layered tablet as described above. Such an outer polyethylene oxide layer provides a lag time before the release of the active agent starts and/or a slower overall release rate.
In certain embodiments of the invention a stacked bi or multi layered tablet is manufactured, wherein at least one of the layers contains an extended release formulation as described above and at least one of the other layers contains an immediate release formulation of the active agent contained by the extended release formulation or a second different active agent. In certain such embodiments the tablet is a bi layered tablet with on extended release formulation layer as described herein and an immediate release formulation layer. In certain such embodiments, in particular the bi layered tablets, opioid analgesics are contained by the extended release layer and further non opioid analgesics are contained by the immediate release layer. Non opioid analgesics may be non steroidal anti inflammatory agents but also non opioid analgesics such as acetaminophen. Acetaminophen can e.g. be used in combination with hydrocodone as opioid analgesic. Such tablets can be prepared by specific tablet compression techniques which allow the compression of at least two compositions to form tablets with at least two distinct stacked layers each comprising one of the at least two compositions. For example, such tablets can be manufactured in a tablet press by filling the compression tool with the first composition and compressing said first composition and subsequently filling on top of the compressed first composition the second composition and subsequently compressing the two compositions to form the final layered tablet. The immediate release composition may be any composition as known in the art.
The invention also encompasses the use of high molecular weight polyethylene oxide that has, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of at least 1,000,000, as matrix forming material in the manufacture of a solid extended release oral dosage form comprising an active selected from opioids for imparting to the solid extended release oral dosage form resistance to alcohol extraction. The use may be accomplished as described herein with respect to the described process or the described formulations or in any other way as conventional in the art.
It has been observed that the formulations of the present invention comprising a high molecular weight polyethylene oxide can be flattened to a thickness of between about 15 and about 18% of the non flattened thickness and that the flat tablet resumes in part or substantially resumes its initial non flattened shape during dissolution, neglecting the swelling that also takes place during dissolution, i.e. the thickness of the tablet increases and the diameter decreases considerably during dissolution. Without wanting to be bound to any theory it is believed that the high molecular weight polyethylene oxide has a form memory and the ability to restore the initial form after deformation, e.g. after flattening, in an environment that allows the restoration, such as an aqueous environment used in dissolution tests. This ability is believed to contribute to the tamper resistance, in particular the alcohol resistance of the dosage forms of the present invention.
The invention also encompasses the method of treatment wherein a dosage form is administered for treatment of a disease or certain condition of a patient that requires treatment in particular pain and the use of a dosage form according to the invention for the manufacture of a medicament for the treatment of a disease or certain condition of a patient that requires treatment in particular pain.
In one aspect of the present invention, a twice-a-day solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided which provides a mean tmax, at about 2 to about 6 hours or at about 2.5 to about 5.5 hours or at about 2.5 to about 5 hours after administration at steady state or of a single dose to human subjects. The dosage form may comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof or hydromorphone or a salt thereof.
In one aspect of the present invention, a once-a-day solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided which provides a mean tmax at about 3 to about 10 hours or at about 4 to about 9 hours or at about 5 to about 8 hours after administration at steady state or of a single dose to human subjects. The dosage form may comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof or hydromorphone or a salt thereof.
In a further aspect of the present invention, a twice-a-day solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, wherein the dosage form comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof in an amount of from about 10 mg to about 160 ing and wherein the dosage form provides a mean maximum plasma concentration (Cmax) of oxycodone up to about 240 ng/mL or from about 6 ng/mL to about 240 ng/mL after administration at steady state or of a single dose to human subjects.
In a further aspect of the present invention, a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, wherein the dosage form comprises oxycodone or a salt thereof in an amount of from about 10 mg to about 40 mg and wherein the dosage form provides a mean maximum plasma concentration (Cmax) of oxycodone from about 6 ng/mL to about 60 ng/mL after administration at steady state or of a single dose to human subjects.
In a further aspect of the invention a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided that is bioequivalent to the commercial product OxyContinTM.
In a further aspect of the invention a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided that is bioequivalent to the commercial product PalladoneTM as sold in the United States in 2005.
In a further aspect of the invention, a solid oral extended release pharmaceutical dosage form is provided, wherein the active agent is oxycodone hydrochloride and wherein a dosage form comprising 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride when tested in a comparative clinical study is bioequivalent to a reference tablet containing 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride in a matrix formulation containing:

    
    
        a) Oxycodone hydrochloride: 10.0 mg/tablet
        b) Lactose (spray-dried): 69.25 mg/tablet
        c) Povidone: 5.0 mg/tablet
        d) Eudragit® RS 30D (solids): 10.0 mg/tablet
        e) Triacetin®: 2.0 mg/tablet
        f) Stearyl alcohol: 25.0 mg/tablet
        g) Talc: 2.5 mg/tablet
        h) Magnesium Stearate: 1.25 mg/tablet;
    
    
    and wherein the reference tablet is prepared by the following steps:
    1. Eudragit® RS 30D and Triacetin® are combined while passing through a 60 mesh screen, and mixed under low shear for approximately 5 minutes or until a uniform dispersion is observed.
    2. Oxycodone HCl, lactose, and povidone are placed into a fluid bed granulator/dryer (FBD) bowl, and the suspension sprayed onto the powder in the fluid bed.
    3. After spraying, the granulation is passed through a #12 screen if necessary to reduce lumps.
    4. The dry granulation is placed in a mixer.
    5. In the meantime, the required amount of stearyl alcohol is melted at a temperature of approximately 70° C.
    6. The melted stearyl alcohol is incorporated into the granulation while mixing.
    7. The waxed granulation is transferred to a fluid bed granulator/dryer or trays and allowed to cool to room temperature or below.
    8. The cooled granulation is then passed through a #12 screen.
    9. The waxed granulation is placed in a mixer/blender and lubricated with the required amounts of talc and magnesium stearate for approximately 3 minutes.
    10. The granulate is compressed into 125 mg tablets on a suitable tabletting machine.


Pharmacokinetic parameters such as Cmax and tmax, AUCt, AUCint, etc. describing the blood plasma curve can be obtained in clinical trials, first by single-dose administration of the active agent, e.g. oxycodone to a number of test persons, such as healthy human subjects. The blood plasma values of the individual test persons are then averaged, e.g. a mean AUC, Cmax, and tmax value is obtained. In the context of the present invention, pharmacokinetic parameters such as AUC, Cmax, and tmax refer to mean values. Further, in the context of the present invention, in vivo parameters such as values for AUC, Cmax, tmax, or analgesic efficacy refer to parameters or values obtained after administration at steady state or of a single dose to human patients.
The Cmax value indicates the maximum blood plasma concentration of the active agent. The tmax value indicates the time point at which the Cmax value is reached. In other words, tmax is the time point of the maximum observed plasma concentration.
The AUC (Area Under the Curve) value corresponds to the area of the concentration curve. The AUC value is proportional to the amount of active agent absorbed into the blood circulation in total and is hence a measure for the bioavailability.
The AUCt value corresponds to the area under the plasma concentration-time curve from the time of administration to the last measurable plasma concentration and is calculated by the linear up/log down trapezoidal rule.
AUCinf is the area under the plasma concentration-time curve extrapolated to infinity and is calculated using the formula:




  
    AUC
    inf
  
  =
  
    
      AUC
      t
    
    +
    
      
        C
        t
      
      
        λ
        Z
      
    
  




where Ct is the last measurable plasma concentration and λZ is the apparent terminal phase rate constant.

λZ is the apparent terminal phase rate constant, where λZ is the magnitude of the slope of the linear regression of the log concentration versus time profile during the terminal phase.
t1/2Z is the apparent plasma terminal phase half-life and is commonly determined as t1/2Z=(ln 2)/λZ.
The lag time tlag is estimated as the timepoint immediately prior to the first measurable plasma concentration value.
The term “healthy” human subject refers to a male or female with average values as regards height, weight and physiological parameters, such as blood pressure, etc. Healthy human subjects for the purposes of the present invention are selected according to inclusion and exclusion criteria which are based on and in accordance with recommendations of the International Conference for Harmonization of Clinical Trials (ICH).
Thus, inclusion criteria comprise males and females aged between 18 to 50 years, inclusive, a body weight ranging from 50 to 100 kg (110 to 220 lbs) and a Body Mass Index (BMI)≧18 and ≦34 (kg/m2), that subjects are healthy and free of significant abnormal findings as determined by medical history, physical examination, vital signs, and electrocardiogram, that females of child-bearing potential must be using an adequate and reliable method of contraception, such as a barrier with additional spermicide foam or jelly, an intra-uterine device, hormonal contraception (hormonal contraceptives alone are not acceptable), that females who are postmenopausal must have been postmenopausal ≧1 year and have elevated serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH), and that subjects are willing to eat all the food supplied during the study.
A further inclusion criterium may be that subjects will refrain from strenuous exercise during the entire study and that they will not begin a new exercise program nor participate in any unusually strenuous physical exertion.
Exclusion criteria comprise that females are pregnant (positive beta human chorionic gonadotropin test) or lactating, any history of or current drug or alcohol abuse for five years, a history of or any current conditions that might interfere with drug absorption, distribution, metabolism or excretion, use of an opioid-containing medication in the past thirty (30) days, a history of known sensitivity to oxycodone, naltrexone, or related compounds, any history of frequent nausea or emesis regardless of etiology, any history of seizures or head trauma with current sequelae, participation in a clinical drug study during the thirty (30) days preceding the initial dose in this study, any significant illness during the thirty (30) days preceding the initial dose in this study, use of any medication including thyroid hormone replacement therapy (hormonal contraception is allowed), vitamins, herbal, and/or mineral supplements, during the 7 days preceding the initial dose, refusal to abstain from food for 10 hours preceding and 4 hours following administration or for 4 hours following administration of the study drugs and to abstain from caffeine or xanthine entirely during each confinement, consumption of alcoholic beverages within forty-eight (48) hours of initial study drug administration (Day 1) or anytime following initial study drug administration, history of smoking or use of nicotine products within 45 days of study drug administration or a positive urine cotinine test, blood or blood products donated within 30 days prior to administration of the study drugs or anytime during the study, except as required by the clinical study protocol, positive results for urine drug screen, alcohol screen at check-in of each period, and hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg), hepatitis B surface antibody HBsAb (unless immunized), hepatitis C antibody (anti-HCV), a positive Naloxone HCl challenge test, presence of Gilbert's Syndrome or any known hepatobiliary abnormalities and that the Investigator believes the subject to be unsuitable for reason(s) not specifically stated above.
Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria will be randomized into the study.
The enrolled population is the group of subjects who provide informed consent.
The randomized safety population is the group of subjects who are randomized, receive study drug, and have at least one post dose safety assessment.
The full analysis population for PK metrics will be the group of subjects who are randomized, receive study drug, and have at least one valid PK metric. Subjects experiencing emesis within 12 hours after dosing might be included based on visual inspection of the PK profiles prior to database lock. Subjects and profiles/metrics excluded from the analysis set will be documented in the Statistical Analysis Plan.
For the Naloxone HCl challenge test, vital signs and pulse oximetry (SPO2) are obtained prior to the Naloxone HCl challenge test. The Naloxone HCl challenge may be administered intravenously or subcutaneously. For the intravenous route, the needle or cannula should remain in the arm during administration. 0.2 mg of Naloxone HCl (0.5 mL) are administered by intravenous injection. The subject is observed for 30 seconds for evidence of withdrawal signs or symptoms. Then 0.6 mg of Naloxone HCl (1.5 mL) are administered by intravenous injection. The subject is observed for 20 minutes for signs and symptoms of withdrawal. For the subcutaneous route, 0.8 mg of Naloxone HCl (2.0 mL) are administered and the subject is observed for 20 minutes for signs and symptoms of withdrawal Following the 20-minute observation, post-Naloxone HCl challenge test vital signs and SPO2 are obtained.
Vital signs include systolic blood pressure, diastolic blood pressure, pulse rate, respiratory rate, and oral temperature.
For the “How Do You Feel?” Inquiry, subjects will be asked a non-leading “How Do You Feel?” question such as “Have there been any changes in your health status since screening/since you were last asked?” at each vital sign measurement. Subject's response will be assessed to determine whether an adverse event is to be reported. Subjects will also be encouraged to voluntarily report adverse events occurring at any other time during the study.
Each subject receiving a fed treatment will consume a standard high-fat content meal in accordance with the “Guidance for Industry: Food-Effect Bioavailability and Fed Bioequivalence Studies” (US Department of Health and Human Services, Food and Drug Administration, Center for Drug Evaluation and Research, December 2002). The meal will be provided 30 minutes before dosing and will be eaten at a steady rate over a 25-minute period so that it is completed by 5 minutes before dosing.
Clinical laboratory evaluations performed in the course of clinical studies include biochemistry (fasted at least 10 hours), hematology, serology, urinalysis, screen for drugs of abuse, and further tests.
Biochemistry evaluations (fasted at least 10 hours) include determination of albumin, Alkaline Phosphatase, alanine aminotransferase (alanine transaminase, ALT), aspartate aminotransferase (aspartate transaminase, AST), calcium, chloride, creatinine, glucose, inorganic phosphate, potassium, sodium, total bilirubin, total protein, urea, lactate dehydrogenase (LDH), direct bilirubin and CO2.
Hematology evaluations include determination of hematocrit, hemoglobin, platelet count, red blood cell count, white blood cell count, white blood cell differential (% and absolute): basophils, eosinophils, lymphocytes, monocytes and neutrophils.
Serology evaluations include determination of hepatitis B surface antigen (HBsAg), hepatitis B surface antibody (HBsAb) and hepatitis C antibody (anti-HCV).
Urinalysis evaluations include determination of color, appearance, pH, glucose, ketones, urobilinogen, nitrite, occult blood, protein, leukocyte esterase, microscopic and macroscopic evaluation, specific gravity.
Screen for drugs of abuse includes urin screen with respect to opiates, amphetamines, cannabinoids, benzodiazepines, cocaine, cotinine, barbiturates, phencyclidine, methadone and propoxyphene and alcohol tests, such as blood alcohol and breathalyzer test.
Further tests for females only include serum pregnancy test, urine pregnancy test and serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) test (for self reported postmenopausal females only).
DETAILED DESCRIPTION OF THE PREFERRED EMBODIMENTS
The present invention will now be more fully described with reference to the accompanying examples. It should be understood, however, that the following description is illustrative only and should not be taken in any way as a restriction of the invention.
Example 1
In Example 1 a 200 mg tablet including 10 mg of oxycodone HCl was prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide in combination with hydroxypropyl cellulose.
Composition:















Ingredient
mg/unit
%




















Oxycodone HCl
10
5



Polyethylene Oxide
160
80



(MW: approximately





4,000,000;





Polyox TM WSR- 301)





Hydroxypropyl
30
15



Cellulose





(Klucel TM HXF)





Total
200
100










Process of Manufacture:

The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. Oxycodone HCl, Polyethylene Oxide and hydroxypropyl cellulose was dry mixed in a low/high shear Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade mixer with a 1.5 cup capacity.
    2. Step 1 blend was compressed to target weight on a single station tablet Manesty Type F 3 press
    3. Step 2 tablets were spread onto a tray and placed in a Hotpack model 435304 oven at 70° C. for approximately 14.5 hours to cure the tablets.


In vitro testing including testing tamper resistance (hammer and breaking strength test) and resistance to alcohol extraction was performed as follows.
The tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 2 (paddle) at 50 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 230 nM. The results are presented in Table 1.1.
Uncured tablets, cured tablets and tampered, i.e. flattened, cured tablets were tested. The cured tablets were flattened with a hammer using 7 manually conducted hammer strikes to impart physical tampering. The tablet dimensions before and after the flattening and the dissolution profiles were evaluated on separate samples. The results are presented in Table 1.1.
As a further tamper resistance test, the cured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are also presented in Table 1.1.
In addition, cured tablets were tested in vitro using ethanol/SGF media at ethanol concentrations of 0%, 20% and 40% to evaluate alcohol extractability. Testing was performed using USP Apparatus 2 (paddle) at 50 rpm in 500 ml of media at 37° C., using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 220 nM. Sample time points include 0.5 and 1 hour. The results are also presented in Table 1.2.










TABLE 1.1










Cured















Flattened by 




Uncured 

7 hammer 




whole
Whole
strikes





Tablet 
Thickness (mm)
 4.52 1
 4.39 1
 2.23 2


Dimensions
Diameter (mm)
—
 7.56 1
10.27 2



Breaking strength (N)
—
196+ 3
—



Diameter (mm) 
—
 7.33 1
—



post breaking strength test 





Dissolution 
0.5 hr
13
 34
33


(% Released)
  1 hr
18
 46
45


(n = 3 tabs 
  2 hr
28
 63
62


per vessel)
  4 hr
43
 81
83



  8 hr
65
 86
87



 17 hr
85
 86
87





1 n = median of 3 measurements


2 n = median of 5 measurements


3 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break, n = median of 3 measurements













TABLE 1.2







Dissolution


(% Released)


(n = 2 tabs per vessel)











0% Ethanol
20% Ethanol
40% Ethanol



Concentration
Concentration
Concentration



in SGF
in SGF
in SGF













Time
uncured
cured
uncured
cured
uncured
cured
















0.5
13
37
13
32
11
33


1
22
50
21
46
22
43









Example 2
In Example 2 three different 100 mg tablets including 10 and 20 mg of Oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide and optionally hydroxypropyl cellulose.
Compositions:














Example 2.1
Example 2.2
Example 2.3


Ingredient
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit


















Oxycodone HCl
10
20
10


Polyethylene Oxide
90
80
85


(MW: approximately





4,000,000;





Polyox TM WSR301)





Hydroxypropyl
0
0
5


Cellulose





(Klucel TM HXF)





Total
100
100
100









Process of Manufacture:

The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. Oxycodone HCl, Polyethylene Oxide and Hydroxypropyl Cellulose were dry mixed in a low/high shear Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade mixer with a 1.5 cup capacity.
    2. Step 1 blend was compressed to target weight on a single station tablet Manesty Type F 3 press.
    3. Step 2 tablets were spread onto a tray placed in a Hotpack model 435304 oven at 70-75° C. for approximately 6 to 9 hours to cure the tablets.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (bench press and breaking strength test) was performed as follows.
The cured tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 2 (paddle) at 50 rpm in 500 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV at 220 nM. Cured tablets and cured flattened tablets were tested. The tablets were flattened using 2500 psi with a Carver style bench press to impart physical tampering. The results are presented in Table 2.
As a further tamper resistance test, the cured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are presented in Table 2.











TABLE 2









Example 2.1
Example 2.2
Example 2.3















Flattened

Flattened

Flattened



Whole
by bench
Whole
by bench
Whole
by bench



(n = 6)
press
(n = 2)
press
(n = 5)
press


















Tablet
Thickness
   3.36
0.58
   3.14
0.84
   3.48
0.49


Dimensions
(mm)



Diameter
   6.48
12.80
   6.58
13.44
   6.46
12.86



(mm)



Thickness
—
17.3
—
26.8
—
14.0



(%)



Breaking
 196+ 1 
n/a
 196+ 1 
n/a
 196+ 1 
n/a



strength (N)















Dissolution
0.5
hr
34
46
42
50
40
56


(% Released)
1
hr
50
62
57
71
55
72


(n = 1)
2
hr
72
78
78
91
77
89



4
hr
81
82
95
93
93
100



8
hr
82
82
95
93
94
100



12
hr
83
82
96
94
95
101





1 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break






Example 3
In Example 3 a 200 mg tablet prepared including 10 mg oxycodone HCl and high molecular weight polyethylene oxide were prepared.
Composition:















Ingredient
mg/unit
%




















Oxycodone HCl
10
5



Polyethylene Oxide
188
94



(MW: approximately





4,000,000;





Polyox TM WSR301)





Magnesium Stearate
2
1



Total
200
100










Process of Manufacture:

The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. Oxycodone HCl, Polyethylene Oxide and Magnesium Stearate were dry mixed in a low/high shear Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade mixer with a 1.5 cup capacity.
    2. Step 1 blend was compressed to target weight on a single station tablet Manesty Type F 3 press.
    3. Step 2 tablets were placed onto a tray placed in a Hotpack model 435304 oven at 70° C. for 1 to 14 hours to cure the tablets.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (breaking strength test) was performed as follows:
The tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20 USP Apparatus, UV at 220 nM, after having been subjected to curing for 2, 3, 4, 8, and 14 hours. Tablet dimensions of the uncured and cured tablets and dissolution results are presented in Table 3.
As a further tamper resistance test, the cured and uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are presented in Table 3.










TABLE 3









Un-
Cure Time (hours)














Cured 2
1 1
2 1
4 1
8 1
14 2


















Tablet
Weight
208
208   
209 
209 
209 
210 


Dimensions
(mg)



Thickness
4.74
5.17
   5.25
   5.17
   5.17
   4.85



(mm)



Diameter
7.93
7.85
   7.80
   7.75
   7.69
   7.64



(mm)



Breaking
176
196+3  
 196+3
 196+3
 196+3
 196+3



strength (N)















Dissolution
0.5
hr
Not
Not
16
11
15
33


(% Released)
1
hr
tested
tested
23
18
23
50


(n = 2)
2
hr


34
28
36
69



4
hr


54
45
58
87



8
hr


81
69
83
93



12
hr


96
83
92
94





1 Tablet dimensions n = 4


2 Tablet dimensions n = 10


3196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.






Example 4
In Example 4 six different 100 mg tablets (Examples 4.1 to 4.6) including 10 mg of oxycodone HCl are prepared varying the amount and molecular weight of the used polyethylene oxides.
Compositions:

















4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6



mg/
mg/
mg/
mg/
mg/
mg/


Ingredient
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit





















Oxycodone HCl
10
10
10
10
10
10


Polyethylene Oxide
89.5
79.5
69.5
89.0
0
0


(MW: approximately


4,000,000;


Polyox TM WSR 301)


Polyethylene Oxide
0
10
20
0
0
0


(MW; approximately


100,000;


Polyox TM N10)


Polyethylene Oxide
0
0
0
0
0
89.5


(MW: approximately


2,000,000;


Polyox TMN-60K)


Polyethylene Oxide
0
0
0
0
89.5
0


MW; approximately


7,000,000;


Polyox TM WSR 303)


Butylated
0
0
0
0.5
0
0


Hydroxytoluene


(BHT)


Magnesium Stearate
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.5


Total
100
100
100
100
100
100


Blend size (g)
125
125
125
125
157.5
155.5


Total Batch size (g)
250
250
250
250
157.5
155.5


(amount manufactured)









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. Oxycodone HCl and Polyethylene Oxide (and BHT if required) were dry mixed for 30 seconds in a low/high shear Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade mixer
    2. Magnesium stearate was added to Step 1 blend and mixed for an additional 30 seconds.
    3. Step 2 blend was compressed to target weight on a single station tablet Manesty Type F 3 press using standard round (0.2656 inch) concave tooling
    4. Step 3 tablets were loaded into a 15 inch coating pan (LCDS Vector Laboratory Development Coating System) at 38 rpm equipped with one baffle. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed inside the coating pan near the bed of tablets to monitor the bed temperature. The tablet bed was heated to a temperature of about 70-about 80° C. (the temperature can be derived from Tables 4.1 to 4.6 for each Example) for a minimum of 30 minutes and a maximum of 2 hours. The tablet bed was then cooled and discharged.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (breaking strength and hammer test) was performed as follows:
Uncured and tablets cured at 0.5, 1, 1.5 and 2 hours of curing were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20, UV wavelength at 220 nM. Tablet dimensions and dissolution results corresponding to the respective curing time and temperature are presented in Tables 4.1 to 4.6.
As a further tamper resistance test, the cured and uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are provided in Tables 4.1 to 4.6.
Additionally, the tablets were flattened with a hammer using 10 manually conducted hammer strikes to impart physical tampering (hammer test).









TABLE 4.1









Example 4.1










Uncured
Cure Time (hours) (n = 5)













(n = 10)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
108
109   
108   
107   
107   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.64
3.93
3.94
3.90
3.83



Diameter (mm)
6.74
6.62
6.57
6.55
6.52



Breaking
94
196+ 2  
196+ 2  
196+ 2  
196+ 2  



strength (N)



Diameter (mm)
mashed 1
5.15
5.38
5.23
5.44



post breaking



strength test



(measured directly



after the test)














Curing
0
min

19.7 
—
—
—


Process
10
min
—
66.2 
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
20
min
—
68.6 
—
—
—


Temp ° C.
30
min
—
73.5 
—
—
—


(temperature
40
min
—
—
76.9 
—
—


probe
60
min
—
—
78.9 
—
—


within the
90
min
—
—
—
79.8 
—


pan)
120
min
—
—
—
—
80.2 














n =
3
3  
2  
2  
2  














Dissolution
0.5
hr
19
21  
18  
18  
19  


(% Released)
1
hr
30
32  
30  
29  
31  



2
hr
47
49  
46  
46  
50  



4
hr
71
76  
70  
69  
75  



8
hr
93
96  
91  
89  
93  



12
hr
99
99  
96  
93  
96  














n =


1  
1  
1  












Post Hammer Test3 (10 strikes
n/a
1.70
2.18
2.37
2.09


applied manually)


2.31
2.06
2.26


Thickness (mm)


2.39
2.66
2.28





1 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test


2 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break


3Applied 10 hammer strikes, the tablets flattened but did not break apart, hammering imparted some edge splits.















TABLE 4.2









Example 4.2










Uncured
Cure Time (hours) (n = 5)













(n = 10)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
108
109   
109   
109   
107   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.65
3.90
3.92
3.87
3.74



Diameter (mm)
6.74
6.61
6.54
6.52
6.46



Breaking strength (N)
93
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  



Diameter (mm)
mashed 2
5.40
5.37
5.36
5.61



post breaking strength



test (measured directly



after the test)



Relaxed diameter (mm)
—
5.60
5.52
5.48
5.73



post breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)














Curing
0
min

20.2 
—
—
—


Process
10
min
—
71.6 
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
20
min
—
74.9 
—
—
—


Temp ° C.
30
min
—
76.1 
—
—
—


(temperature
40
min
—
—
79.8 
—
—


probe within
60
min
—
—
80.2 
—
—


the pan)
90
min
—
—
—
76.4 
—



120
min
—
—
—
—
77.5 


Dissolution
0.5
hr
—
20  
20  
—
29  


(% Released)
1
hr
—
30  
31  
—
44  


(n = 3)
2
hr
—
47  
47  
—
66  



4
hr
—
70  
70  
—
90  



8
hr
—
89  
91  
—
95  



12
hr
—
92  
94  
—
94  














n =

1  
1  
1  
1  












Post Hammer Test (10 strikes
n/a
1.98
2.00
1.80
1.62


applied manually)

1.96
1.76
2.06
1.95


Thickness (mm)

1.99
1.79
1.98
1.53





2 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test


3 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.















TABLE 4.3









Example 4.3










Uncured
Cure Time (hours) (n = 5)













(n = 10)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
108
107   
108   
108   
107   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.63
3.85
3.82
3.78
3.72



Diameter (mm)
6.74
6.61
6.55
6.48
6.46



Breaking strength (N)
91
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  



Diameter (mm)
mashed 2
5.58
5.60
5.56
5.72



post breaking strength



test (measured directly



after the test)



Relaxed diameter (mm)
—
5.77
5.75
5.68
5.82



post breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)














Curing
0
min

20.3 
—
—
—


Process
10
min
—
71.0 
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
20
min
—
74.1 
—
—
—


Temp ° C.
30
min
—
75.9 
—
—
—


(temperature
40
min
—
—
76.5 
—
—


probe within
60
min
—
—
77.8 
—
—


the pan
90
min
—
—
—
76.0 
—


within the
120
min
—
—
—
—
80.2 


pan)














n =

3  
3  

2  














Dissolution
0.5
hr
—
22  
23  
—
33  


(% Released)
1
hr
—
32  
35  
—
52  



2
hr
—
49  
54  
—
76  



4
hr
—
70  
80  
—
93  



8
hr
—
94  
95  
—
96  



12
hr
—
96  
96  
—
96  














n =

1  
1  
1  
1  












Post Hammer Test (10 strikes
n/a
2.16
1.95
1.43
1.53


applied manually)

1.96
1.85
1.67
1.66


Thickness (mm)

1.91
2.03
1.65
2.08





2 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test


3 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.















TABLE 4.4









Example 4.4










Uncured
Cure Time (hours) (n = 5)













(n = 10)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
101   
101   
101   
101   
101   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.49
3.75
3.71
3.69
3.70



Diameter (mm)
6.75
6.59
6.55
6.55
6.52



Breaking strength (N)
81
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  



Diameter (mm)
mashed 2
5.39
5.39
5.39
5.47



post breaking strength



test (measured directly



after the test



Relaxed diameter (mm)
—
5.58
5.59
5.58
5.63



post breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)














Curing
0
min

37.3 





Process
5
min
—
67.0 
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
10
min
—
71.8 
—
—
—


Temp ° C.
20
min
—
74.6 
—
—
—


(temperature
30
min
—
76.2 
—
—
—


probe within
40
min
—
—
77.0 
—
—


the pan)
60
min
—
—
78.7 
—
—



90
min
—
—
—
80.3 
—



120
min
—
—
—
—
79.3 


Dissolution
0.5
hr
—
17  
16  
—
—


(% Released)
1
hr
—
26  
25  
—
—


(n = 3)
2
hr
—
41  
40  
—
—



4
hr
—
63  
59  
—
—



8
hr
—
79  
75  
—
—



12
hr
—
82  
80  
—
—














n =

1  
1  
1  
1  












Post Hammer Test (10 strikes
—
2.11
2.42
2.14
2.18


applied manually)

2.29
2.25
2.28
2.09


Thickness (mm)

2.32
2.13
2.07
2.36





2 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test.


3 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.















TABLE 4.5









Example 4.5










Uncured
Cure Time (hours) (n = 5)













(n = 10)
0.5
1.0
1.5
2.0

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
108
108   
107   
107   
107   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.61
3.87
3.84
3.84
3.84



Diameter (mm)
6.74
6.69
6.63
6.61
6.59



Breaking strength (N)
116
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  
196+ 3  



Diameter (mm)
mashed 2
5.49
5.59
5.51
5.54



post breaking strength



test (measured directly



after the test



Diameter (mm)
—
5.67
5.76
5.67
5.68



post breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)














Curing
0
min

19.8 





Process
5
min
—
56.8 
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
10
min
—
70.0 
—
—
—


Temp ° C.
20
min
—
74.6 
—
—
—


(temperature
30
min
—
76.2 
—
—
—


probe within
40
min
—
—
77.0 
—
—


the pan)
60
min
—
—
78.2 
—
—



90
min
—
—
—
80.2 
—



120
min
—
—
—
—
80.3 


Dissolution
0.5
hr
—
21  
20  
—
—


(% Released)
1
hr
—
33  
32  
—
—


(n = 3)
2
hr
—
51  
51  
—
—



4
hr
—
75  
76  
—
—



8
hr
—
96  
96  
—
—



12
hr
—
100   
100   
—
—














n =

1  
1  
1  
1  












Post Hammer Test (10 strikes
—
2.19
2.31
2.36
2.45


applied manually)

2.15
2.48
2.42
2.08


Thickness (mm)

2.10
2.28
2.19
2.28





2 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test


3 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.















TABLE 4.6









Example 4.6










UnCured
Cure Time (n = 5)















(n = 6)
10 min
20 min
0.5 hr
1.0 hr
1.5 hr
2.0 hr



















Tablet
Weight (mg)
110
108
108
109
108
109
109


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.65
3.93
3.89
3.89
3.87
3.85
3.85



Diameter (mm)
6.73
6.71
6.63
6.61
6.57
6.55
6.53











Breaking strength (N)
128
196+ 2
















Diameter (mm)
mashed 1
5.27
5.47
5.51
5.51
5.56
5.63



post breaking strength



test (measured directly



after the test



Diameter (mm) post
—
5.48
5.60
5.67
5.66
5.69
5.76



breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)
















Curing
0
min

30.8







Process
5
min
—
70.5
—
—
—
—
—


Tablet Bed
10
min

79.5


Temp ° C.
20
min
—
—
79.9
—
—
—
—


(temperature
30
min
—
—
—
79.6
—
—
—


probe within
40
min
—
—
—
—
80.0
—
—


the pan)
60
min
—
—
—
—
79.8
—
—



90
min
—
—
—
—
—
80.2
—



120
min
—
—
—
—
—
—
80.4


Dissolution
0.5
hr
—
—
—
19
20
—
—


(% Released)
1
hr
—
—
—
30
30
—
—


(n = 3)
2
hr
—
—
—
48
51
—
—



4
hr
—
—
—
73
78
—
—



8
hr
—
—
—
99
99
—
—



12
hr
—
—
—
99
102
—
—
















n =

1
1
1
1
1
1














Post Hammer Test 3 (10 strikes
—
1.46
2.18
2.45
2.23
2.38
2.42


applied manually)

1.19
2.20
2.34
2.39
2.26
2.40


Thickness (mm)

1.24
2.18
2.03
2.52
2.50
2.16





1 Tablets mashed and crumbled during the breaking strength test


2 196+ means that subjected to the maximum force of 196 Newton the tablets did not break.


3 The tablets flattened but did not break apart, hammering imparted some edge splits.






Example 5
In Example 5 three further tablets including 10% (by wt) of oxycodone HCl were prepared.
Compositions:














Example 5.1
Example 5.2
Example 5.3








mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit


Tablet
(%)
(%)
(%)
















Oxycodone HCl
12 
(10)
20
(10)
12 
(10)


Polyethylene Oxide
106.8 
(89)
178 
(89)
82.8 
(69)










(MW: approximately





4,000,000;





Polyox TM WSR 301)














Polyethylene Oxide
0
0
24 
(20)










(1 MW; approximately





100,000;





Polyox TM N10)
















Magnesium Stearate
1.2
(1)
2.0 
(1)
1.2 
(1)










Total
120
200
120


Total Batch size (kg)
100
100
100


(amount manufactured)








Coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
















Opadry white film
3.6
(3)
6.0 
(3)
3. 
(3)










coating concentrate





formula Y-5-18024-A









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The polyethylene oxide was passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride\
        Polyethylene oxide N10 (only Example 5.3)
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes (Example 5.1) or 20 minutes (Example 5.2) and 15 minutes (Example 5.3) with the I bar on.
    4. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    6. Step 5 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    7. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 135,000 tph speed using 9/32 standard round, concave (plain) tooling.
    8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at 7 rpm at a pan load of 98.6 kg (Example 5.1), 92.2 kg (Example 5.2) and 96.9 kg (Example 5.3) and the tablet bed was heated using an exhaust air temperature to achieve approximately 80° C. (Example 5.2 and 5.3) and 75° C. (Example 5.1) inlet temperature and cured for 1 hour at the target inlet temperature.
    9. The pan speed was continued at 7 to 10 rpm and the tablet bed was cooled using an exhaust air temperature to achieve a 25° C. inlet temperature until the bed temperature achieves 30-34° C.
    10. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to achieve a 55° C. inlet temperature. The film coating was started once the outlet temperature approached 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
    11. After coating was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C., the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27-30° C.
    12. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (breaking strength and hammer test) and resistance to alcohol extraction were performed as follows:
Tablets cured at 0.5 hours and tablets cured at 1.0 hour and coated were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using an Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453, UV wavelength at 220 nM. Tablet dimensions and dissolution results corresponding to the respective curing time and temperature are presented in Tables 5.1 to 5.3.
Tablets cured at 1.0 hour and coated were tested in vitro using ethanol/SGF media at a concentration of 40% ethanol to evaluate alcohol extractability. Testing was performed using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using an Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453, UV wavelength at 230 nM. Tablet dissolution results are presented in Table 5.3.
As a further tamper resistance test, the uncured tablets and cured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 439 Newton using a Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are provided in Tables 5.1 to 5.3.
Additionally, the tablets were flattened with a hammer using 10 manually conducted hammer strikes to impart physical tampering (hammer test).









TABLE 5.1









Example 5.1














30 min 
1 hr cure/





cure 
coated 




Uncured
(n = 10)
(n = 10)





Tablet 
Weight (mg)
119.7 1 
120  
122  


Dimensions
Thickness 
 3.63 2
 3.91
 3.88



(mm)






Diameter 
—
 7.03
 7.02



(mm)






Breaking 
54 3  
439 4  
438 4  



strength (N)






diameter (mm) 
—
 4.18
 4.26



post breaking 






strength















Curing 
10 
min
—
75.8
75.8


Process 
20 
min
—
75.1
75.1


Inlet 
30 
min
—
76.0
76.0


Temp ° C.
40 
min
—
—
74.5



50 
min
—
—
73.5



60 
min
—
—
75.6


Dissolution 
0.5 
hr
—
19  
19  


(% Released) 
1 
hr
—
31  
33  


(n = 3)
2 
hr
—
47  
50  



4 
hr
—
71  
76  



8 
hr
—
93  
97  



12 
hr
—
99  
102  












Hammer Test
—
pre
post
pre
post


(10 strikes applied manually) 

3.90 
1.77
3.87
2.09


Tablet thickness measured 







(mm) pre and post test (n = 3)





1 Fourteen in-process samples taken (40 tablets per each sample) and each sample averaged. The reported value is the average of the averages.


2 n = 39


3 n = 130


4 n = 10; The tablets did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.















TABLE 5.2









Example 5.2














30 min 
1 hr cure/





cure 
coated 




Uncured
(n = 10)
(n = 10)





Tablet 
Weight (mg)
200.4 1 
201  
206  


Dimensions
Thickness
 5.50 2
 5.92
 5.86



(mm)






Diameter 
—
 7.03
 7.01



(mm)






Breaking 
85 3  
439 4  
439 4  



strength (N)






diameter (mm) 
—
 5.52
 5.72



post breaking 






strength















Curing 
10 
min
—
79.7
79.7


Process 
20 
min
—
80.3
80.3


Inlet 
30 
min
—
79.3
79.3


Temp ° C.
40 
min
—
—
79.5



50 
min
—
—
80.9



60 
min
—
—
81.0


Dissolution 
0.5 
hr
—
14  
15  


(% Released) 
1 
hr
—
23  
24  


(n = 3)
2 
hr
—
36  
38  



4 
hr
—
57  
60  



8 
hr
—
83  
85  



12 
hr
—
94  
95  












Hammer Test
—
pre
post
pre
post


(10 strikes applied manually) 

5.92
2.97
5.91
2.84


Tablet thickness measured 







(mm) pre and post test (n = 3)





1 Nine in-process samples taken (40 tablets per each sample) and each sample averaged. The reported value is the average of the averages.


2 n = 27


3 n = 90


4 n = 10; The tablets did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.















TABLE 5.3









Example 5.3














30 min 
1 hr cure/





cure 
coated 




Uncured
(n = 10)
(n = 10)





Tablet 
Weight (mg)
120.5 1 
122  
125  


Dimensions
Thickness 
 3.64 2
 3.85
 3.77



(mm)






Diameter (mm)
—
 7.03
 7.01



Breaking 
56 3  
438 4  
439 4  



strength (N) 






diameter (mm) 
—
 3.96
 4.28



post breaking 






strength















Curing 
10 
min
—
80.0
80.0


Process 
20 
min
—
82.3
82.3


Inlet 
30 
min
—
78.9
78.9


Temp ° C.
40 
min
—
—
79.5



50 
min
—
—
79.5



60 
min
—
—
80.7






















40% 






SGF
SGF
EtOH





Dissolution
0.5 
hr
—
20  
23
21


(% Released) 
1 
hr
—
31  
37
31


(n = 3)
2 
hr
—
50  
58
50



4 
hr
—
76  
86
76



8 
hr
—
95  
100
99



12 
hr
—
98  
100
104












Hammer Test
—
pre
post
pre
post


(10 strikes applied manually) 

3.81
1.63
3.79
1.62


Tablet thickness measured 







(mm) pre and post test (n = 3)










1Twelve in-process samples taken (40 tablets per each sample) and each sample averaged. The reported value is the average of the averages.


2 n = 33


3 n = 130


4 n = 10; The tablets did not break when subjected to a maximum force of 438N/439N.






Example 6
In Example 6 tablets comprising Naltrexone HCl were prepared.
Compositions:
















Tablet
mg/unit







Naltrexone HCl
10



Polyethylene Oxide




(MW: approximately
89.0



4,000,000;




Polyox TM WSR 301)




Magnesium Stearate
1.0



Total
100



Total Batch size (kg)




(amount
20



manufactured)




Coating
mg/unit







Base coat
3.0



Opadry Red film




coating concentration




formula




Y-5-1-15139




Special effects
3.0



overcoat




Opadry FX - Silver




formula 62W28547










The tablets were prepared as outlined in Example 5, wherein a Gemco “V” blender (with I bar) 2 cu·ft, a 8 station rotary tablet press set at 24,000 tph speed with a 9/32 standard round concave (embossed upper/plain lower) tooling and a 24 inch Compu-Lab coater were used. The blending time in step 2 was 8 minutes, the pan load was 9.2 kg and the curing time 2 hours.
Example 7
Three further examples comprising each 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride were manufactured and tested.
Compositions:














Example 
Example 
Example 



7.1
7.2
7.3








mg/unit 
mg/unit 
mg/unit 


Tablet
(%)
(%)
(%)
















Oxycodone HCl
10 
(5)
10 
(6.67)
10 
(10)


Polyethylene Oxide








(MW: approximately 4,000,000;
188 
(94)
138.5 
(92.3)
69 
(69)










Polyox TM WSR 301)














Polyethylene Oxide
0
0
20 
(20)










(MW; approximately 100,000;





Polyox TM N10)
















Magnesium Stearate
2 
(1)
1.5 
(1)
1 
(1)










Total
200
150
100


Total Batch size (kg)





(amount manufactured)
100
100
100





Film Coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit





Opadry white film coating
6
4.5
3


concentrate formula 





Y-5-18024-A









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Polyethylene oxide N10 (only Example 7.3)
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    6. Step 5 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    7. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 135,000 tph speed using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (plain) tooling (Example 7.1 and 7.2) and using 1⁄4 inch standard round, concave (plain) tooling (Example 7.3).
    8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 97.388 kg (Example 7.1). 91.051 kg (Example 7.2) and 89.527 kg (Example 7.3).
    9. The pan speed was set to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet temperature of approximately 75° C. The tablets were cured at the target inlet temperature for 1 hour (Example 7.1 and 7.2) and for 30 minutes (Example 7.3).
    10. The pan speed was continued at 6 to 8 rpm and the tablet bed was cooled using an exhaust air temperature to achieve a 25° C. inlet temperature until the exhaust temperature achieves 30-34° C.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to target a 55° C. inlet temperature. The film coating was started once the outlet temperature approached 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
    12. After coating was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C. the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27-30° C.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (breaking strength, hammer test and flattened tablets) and resistance to alcohol extraction, as well as stability tests were performed as follows:
Cured, coated tablets (whole and flattened) were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and non basic potassium phosphate buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 hours. Additionally sample time points include 1.0, 4.0 and 12 hours.
Cured, coated tablets (whole and flattened) were tested in vitro using ethanol/SGF media at concentrations of 0% and 40% to evaluate alcohol extractability. Testing was performed using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and non basic potassium phosphate buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 0.5, 0.75, 1.0, 1.5 and 2.0 hours.
Cured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 439 Newton using a Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Cured tablets were subject to a high amount of pressure using a Carver manual bench press (hydraulic unit model #3912) to impart physical tampering by flattening the tablets.
Cured tablets were subjected to a further breaking strength test by the manual application of 10 hammer strikes to impart physical tampering.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently testing the tablets in vitro as described above. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage, sample time points regarding dissolution test include 1.0, 4.0 and 12.0 hours.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a further stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently subjecting the tablets to the assay test to determine the content of oxycodone HCl in the tablet samples, in percent relative to the label claim. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the assay test, oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two sets of ten tablets each with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a further stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently subjecting the tablets to the oxycodone-N-oxide (ONO) test to determine the content of the degradation product oxycodone-N-oxide in percent relative to the oxycodone HCl label claim. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the ONO test, oxycodone hydrochloride and its degradation products were extracted from a set of ten tablets with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 206 nm.
The results are presented in Tables 7.1 to 7.3








TABLE 7.1.1








Example 7.1













Flattened 





(n = 3)




Whole
(15,000 lbs




(n = 10)
applied)














Tablet
Weight 
205
207
204


Dimen-
(mg)





sions
Thickness 
5.95
1.011
0.961



(mm)






% 

17.0
16.1



Thickness






Diameter 
7.02
17.132
17.352



(mm)






Breaking 
≧4383





strength (N)






Diameter (mm)
5.84





post Breaking






strength













pre
post





Hammer
6.04
2.96


Test
5.95
3.10


pre 
6.03
3.32


and post




tablet 




thickness




measured




(mm)


















Whole

Flattened




Whole
40%
Flattened
40% 




SGF
EtOH
SGF
EtOH
















Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
11
 9
17
13


tion
0.75 
hr
15
12
23
18


(%
1.0 
hr
20
16
28
21


Released)
1.5 
hr
27
21
36
29


(n = 3)
2.0 
hr
34
27
44
35
















Whole





Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
—


tion
1 
hr
22


(%
2 
hr
—


Released)
4 
hr
57


(n = 6)
8 
hr
—



12 
hr
97





13 measurements per tablet


22 measurements per tablet


3tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 438 Newton















TABLE 7.1.2









Stability tests Example 7.1



Storage conditions (° C./% RH)



and storage time1














1 Mo
2 Mo
3 Mo
3 Mo



Initial
40/75
40/75
25/60
40/75

















Dissolution
1 hr
22
21
21
20
21


(% Released)
4 hr
57
57
58
56
58


(n = 6)
12 hr 
97
98
98
97
97


SGF


Assay test
Assay 1
96.6
96.2
97.3
97.1
95.0


(% oxycodone
Assay 2
95.3
97.2
95.7
98.7
96.0


HCl)2
Average
96.0
96.7
96.5
97.9
95.5












ONO test
0.02
0.06
0.06
0.04
0.05


(% oxycodone N-oxide)2





1[Mo = month(s)];


2relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.














TABLE 7.2.1








Example 7.2













Flattened 





(n = 3)




Whole
(20,000 lbs




(n = 10)
applied)














Tablet
Weight 
154
154
153


Dimen-
(mg)





sions
Thickness 
4.68
0.751
0.771



(mm)






% 

16.0
16.5



Thickness






Diameter 
7.02
17.142
16.902



(mm)






Breaking 
4383





strength (N)






Diameter
4.93





(mm)






post 






Breaking






strength













pre
post





Hammer 
4.73
2.65


Test
4.64
2.95


pre 
4.67
2.60


and post




tablet 




thickness




measured




(mm)


















Whole

Flattened




Whole
40%
Flattened
40% 




SGF
EtOH
SGF
EtOH
















Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
14
10
21
15


tion
0.75 
hr
19
14
27
20


(%
1.0 
hr
24
17
33
26


Released)
1.5 
hr
33
23
44
36


(n = 3)
2.0 
hr
40
29
53
43
















Whole





Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
—


tion
1 
hr
26


(%
2 
hr
—


Released)
4 
hr
67


(n = 6)
8 
hr
—



12 
hr
98





13 measurements per tablet


22 measurements per tablet













TABLE 7.2.2







Stability tests Example 7.2









Storage conditions (° C./% RH) and storage time1
















1 Mo
2 Mo
3 Mo
3 Mo
6 Mo
6 Mo



Initial
40/75
40/75
25/60
40/75
25/60
40/75



















Dissolution
1 hr
26
24
22
23
24
25
25


(% Released)
4 hr
67
66
61
65
64
64
69


(n = 6)
12 hr 
98
101
97
98
99
99
97


SGF


Assay test
Assay 1
97.1
97.7
96.4
98.4
97.3
96.3
94.1


(% oxycodone
Assay 2
96.6
96.6
96.2
98.0
96.9
96.3
94.2


HCl)2
Average
96.9
97.1
96.3
98.2
97.1
96.3
94.2














ONO test
0.02
0.08
0.04
0.03
0.04
0.06
0.26


(% oxycodone N-oxide)2





1[Mo = month(s)];


2relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.














TABLE 7.3.1








Example 7.3













Flattened 





(n = 3)




Whole
(15,000 lbs




(n = 10)
applied)














Tablet
Weight 
103
102
104


Dimen-
(mg)





sions
Thickness 
3.92
0.611
0.661



(mm)

(15.6)
(16.8)



Diameter 
6.25
15.362
15.242



(mm)






Breaking 
4393





strength 






(N)






Diameter 
3.80





(mm)






post 






Breaking






strength













pre
post





Hammer 
3.90
1.66


Test
3.89
1.97


pre 
3.91
1.56


and post




tablet 




thickness




measured




(mm)


















Whole

Flattened




Whole
40%
Flattened
40% 




SGF
EtOH
SGF
EtOH
















Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
19
15
26
19


tion
0.75 
hr
25
20
34
25


(%
1.0 
hr
30
25
40
31


Released)
1.5 
hr
41
33
51
41


(n = 3)
2.0 
hr
50
41
60
50
















Whole





Dissolu-
0.5 
hr
—


tion
1 
hr
32


(%
2 
hr
—


Released)
4 
hr
83


(n = 6)
8 
hr
—



12 
hr
101





13 measurements per tablet


22 measurements per tablet


3The tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 439 Newton.













TABLE 7.3.2







Stability tests Example 7.3











Storage conditions (° C./% RH) and




storage time1















1 Mo
2 Mo
3 Mo




Initial
40/75
40/75
25/60















Dissolution (%
 1 hr
32
29
30
31


Released)
 4 hr
83
76
77
78


(n = 6)
12 hr
101
103
102
103


SGF







Assay test
Assay 1
99.4
99.4
97.3
101.0


(% oxycodone
Assay 2
98.8
98.9
100.0
101.0


HCl)2
Average
99.1
99.1
98.6
101.0











ONO test
0.05
0.01
0.01
0.02


(% oxycodone N-oxide)2





1[Mo = month(s)];


2relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl






Example 8
Two further 160 mg oxycodone hydrochloride tablets (Examples 8.1 and 8.2) were manufactured.
Compositions:













Example 8.1
Example 8.2











Ingredient
mg/unit
%
mg/unit
%














Oxycodone
160
25
160
25


Hydrochloride






Polyethylene Oxide
476.8
74.5
284.8
44.5


(high MW, grade






301)






Polyethylene Oxide
0
0
192
30


(low MW, grade






N10)






Magnesium Stearate
3.2
0.5
3.2
0.5


Total
640
100
640
100









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. Oxycodone HCl and Polyethylene Oxide were dry mixed in a low/high shear Black & Decker Handy Chopper dual blade mixer with a 1.5 cup capacity for 30 seconds.
    2. Magnesium Stearate was added and mixed with the step 1 blend for additional 30 seconds
    3. Step 2 blend was compressed to target weight on a single station tablet Manesty Type F 3 press using a capsule shaped tooling (7.937×14.290 mm).
    4. Step 2 tablets were placed onto a tray placed in a Hotpack model 435304 oven at 73° C. for 3 hours to cure the tablets.


In vitro testing including testing for tamper resistance (breaking strength test) was performed as follows:
The tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using an Agilent UV/VIS Spectrometer Model HP8453, UV wavelength at 280 nM, after having been subjected to curing for 3 hours. Tablet dimensions of the uncured and cured tablets and dissolution results are presented in Table 8.
As a further tamper resistance test, the cured and uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking. The results are presented in Table 8.
Additionally, the tablets were flattened with a hammer using 10 manually conducted hammer strikes to impart physical tampering (hammer test). Results are presented in Table 8.










TABLE 8









Example 8.1
Example 8.2














Uncured
3 hr cure
Uncured
3 hr cure




(n = 12)
(n = 5)
(n = 12)
(n = 10)















Tablet
Weight 
648
648
643
643


Dimensions
(mg)







Thickness 
7.07
7.42
7.01
7.20



(mm)







Width (mm)
7.96
7.97
7.96
7.91



Breaking
196+1
196+1
196+1
196+1



strength(N)
(n = 2)
(n = 1)
(n = 2)
(n = 2)













Dissolution
0.5 
hr
Not 
9
Not
13


(% 
1 
hr
tested
15
tested
21


Released)
2 
hr

23

35



4 
hr

38

59



8 
hr

60

89



12 
hr

76

92











Post Hammer Test
Readily
—
Readily
3.80


(10 strikes applied manually)
broke

broke



Thickness (mm)
apart

apart





1The hardness tester would max at 20+ Kp equivalent to 196+ Newtons (1 Kp = 9.807 Newtons), the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 N.






Example 9
Three examples comprising each 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride were manufactured and tested.
Compositions:














Example 9.1
Example 9.2
Example 9.3


Tablet
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit


















Hydromorphone HCl
12
12
12


Polyethylene Oxide
483
681
829.5


(MW: approximately





7,000,000;





Polyox TM WSR 303)





Magnesium Stearate
5
7
8.5


Total
500
700
850


Total Batch size (kg)
100
100
100


(amount manufactured)





Film Coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit





Magnesium Stearate
0.100
0.142
0.170


Opadry white film
15
21
25.5


coating concentrate





formula Y-5-18024-A





Coating Batch Size (kg)
80
79
80









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The Hydromorphone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order
    
        Approximately 25 kg of the polyethylene oxide WSR 303
        Hydromorphone hydrochloride
        Approximately 25 kg of the polyethylene oxide WSR 303
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. The remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 303 was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    6. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    7. Step 6 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    8. Step 7 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    9. Step 8 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 133,000 tph speed using 1⁄2 inch standard round, concave (plain) tooling.
    10. Step 9 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 80 kg (Example 9.1 and 9.3) and 79 kg (Example 9.2).
    11. The pan speed was set to 2 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve a target inlet temperature of approximately 75° C. The tablets were cured for 1 hour and 15 minutes at the following inlet temperature range, 75-87° C. (Example 9.1), 75-89° C. (Example 9.2) and 75-86° C. (Example 9.3).
    12. At the onset of cooling the pan speed was increased to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was cooled using an exhaust air temperature to achieve a 25° C. inlet temperature until the exhaust temperature achieves 30 34° C. During the cooling process, magnesium stearate was added to the tablet bed to reduce tablet sticking.
    13. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to target a 55° C. inlet temperature. The film coating was started once the outlet temperature approached 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
    14. After coating was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C., the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27-30° C.
    15. The tablets were discharged.


Example 10
A further tablet comprising 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride was prepared.
Composition:















Example 10



Tablet
mg/unit



















Hydromorphone HCl
12



Polyethylene Oxide
483



(MW: approximately 7,000.000; 




Polyox TM WSR 303)




Magnesium Stearate
5



Total
500



Total Batch size (kg)
119.98



(amount manufactured)










The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The hydromorphone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 60 kg of the polyethylene oxide WSR 303
        Hydromorphone hydrochloride
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. The remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 303 was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    6. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    7. Step 6 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    8. Step 7 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    9. Step 8 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 150,000 tph speed using 1⁄2 inch standard round, concave (plain) tooling.
    10. Step 9 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 92.887 kg.
    11. The pan speed was set to 1.9 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve a target inlet temperature of approximately 80° C. The tablets were cured for 2 hours at the following inlet temperature range 80-85° C.
    12. At the end of curing and onset of cooling, the tablet bed began to agglomerate (tablets sticking together). The pan speed was increased up to 2.8 rpm, but the tablet bed fully agglomerated and was non-recoverable for coating.


It is assumed that the agglomeration of tablets can be avoided, for example by lowering the curing temperature, by increasing the pan speed, by the use of Magnesium Stearate as anti-tacking agent, or by applying a sub-coating prior to curing.
However some tablets were sampled prior to cooling for In vitro testing which was performed as follows:
Cured tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 2 (paddle) at 75 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. using an on Waters Alliance System equipped with a Waters Novapak C18 3.9 mm×150 mm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile, SDS, and mono basic sodium phosphate buffer (pH 2.9). Detection was done with a PDA detector. Sample time points include 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 18, and 22 hours.











TABLE 10









USP Apparatus 2




















Dissolution
 1 hr
19



(% Released)
 2 hr
30



(n = 6)
 4 hr
48




 8 hr
77




12 hr
95




18 hr
103




22 hr
104










Example 11
A further tablet comprising 12 mg of hydromorphone hydrochloride was prepared.
Composition:














Tablet
mg/unit



















Hydromorphone HCl
12



Polyethylene Oxide
681



(MW: approximately 7,000.000;




Polyox TM WSR 303)




Magnesium Stearate
7



Total
700



Total Batch size (kg)
122.53



(amount manufactured)







Film Coating
mg/unit







Opadry white film 
21



coating concentrate




formula Y-5-18024-A




Coating Batch Size (kg)
80










The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The hydromorphone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 60 kg of the polyethylene oxide WSR 303
        Hydromorphone hydrochloride
    
    
    3. The remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 303 was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    4. Step 4 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    5. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    6. Step 5 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    7. Step 6 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    8. Step 7 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 150,000 tph speed using 1⁄2 inch standard round, concave (plain) tooling.
    9. Step 8 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 80.000 kg.
    10. The pan speed was set to 1.8 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve a target inlet temperature of approximately 80° C. The tablets were cured for 1.25 hours at the following inlet temperature range 75-85° C.
    11. At the end of curing and onset of cooling, the tablet bed began to agglomerate (tablets sticking together). The pan speed was increased up to 10 rpm, and the tablets separated.
    12. The pan speed was continued at approximately 10 rpm and the tablet bed was cooled using an exhaust air temperature to achieve a 25° C. inlet temperature until the exhaust temperature achieves 30-34° C.
    13. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to target a 55° C. inlet temperature. The film coating was started once the outlet temperature approached 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
    14. After coating was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C., the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27-30° C.
    15. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing was performed as follows:
Coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 2 (paddle) at 75 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. using an a Waters Alliance System equipped with a Waters Novapak C18 3.9 mm×150 mm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile, SDS, and mono basic sodium phosphate buffer (pH 2.9). Detection was done with a PDA detector. Sample time points include 1, 2, 4, 8, 12, 18, 22, and 24 hours. The results are presented in Table 11.











TABLE 11









USP Apparatus 2




















Dissolution
 1 hr
12



(% Released)
 2 hr
19



(Mean n = 6)
 4 hr
29




 8 hr
46




12 hr
60




18 hr
76




22 hr
84




24 hr
88










Example 12
Two further examples comprising 10 mg of oxycodone hydrochloride which include core tablets as presented in Example 2.3 were manufactured which were coated by a polyethylene oxide coating to provide a delay of the release.
Composition: Core Tablet














Ingredient
mg/unit



















Oxycodone HCl
10



Polyethylene Oxide
85



(MW: approximately




4,000,000;




Polyox TM WSR301)




Hydroxypropyl Cellulose
5



(Klucel TM HXF)




Total Tablet Core
100










Composition: Compression Coat Over Core Tablet














Example 12.1
Example 12.2


Ingredient
mg/unit
mg/unit







Polyethylene Oxide
200
100


(MW: approximately




4,000,000;




Polyox TM WSR301)




Core tablet
100
100


Total Tablet Weight
300
200









Process of Manufacture:

    The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:
    1. A tablet from Example 2.3 was used as the tablet core.
    2. A single station Manesty Type F 3 tablet press was equipped with 0.3125 inch, round, standard concave plain tooling.
    3. For Example 12.1, approximately 100 mg of Polyethylene Oxide was placed in the die, the tablet core was manually centered in the die (on top of the powder bed), an additional 100 mg of Polyethylene Oxide was placed on top of the tablet in the die.
    4. The materials were manually compressed by turning the compression wheel.
    5. For Example 12.2, approximately 50 mg of Polyethylene Oxide was placed in the die, the tablet core was manually centered in the die (on top of the powder bed), an additional 50 mg of Polyethylene Oxide was placed on top of the tablet in the die.
    6. The materials were manually compressed by turning the compression wheel.
    7. Step 4 and step 6 tablets were placed onto a tray placed in a Hotpack model 435304 oven targeting 75° C. for 3 hours to cure the compression coated tablets.


In vitro testing was performed as follows:
The tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., using a Perkin Elmer UV/VIS Spectrometer Lambda 20 USP Apparatus, UV at 220 nM. The cured compression coated tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Table 12.










TABLE 12







Example 12.1
Example 12.2




















Tablet
Weight (mg)
304
312
209
210


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
5.62
5.73
5.24
5.29



Diameter (mm)
9.10
9.10
7.61
7.54











Dissolution
0.5 
hr
 0
 1


(% 
1 
hr
 0
15


Released)
2 
hr
 1
47


(n = 2)
4 
hr
 9
95



8 
hr
82
96



12 
hr
97
96









Example 13
In Example 13, five different 156 mg tablets (Examples 13.1 to 13.5) including 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg of Oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide.
Compositions:
















Example
Example 
Example
Example
Example



13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5



mg/
mg/
mg/
mg/
mg/


Ingredient
unit
unit
unit
unit
unit




















Oxycodone 
10
15
20
30
40


HCl







Polyethylene
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5


oxide 







(MW:







approx-







imately







4,000,000;







Polyox TM 







WSR-301)







Magnesium
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5


Stearate







Total Core 
150
150
150
150
150


Tablet







Weight 







(mg)







Total 
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg


Batch







size





Coating
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit





Opadry film
6
6
6
6
6


coating







Total 
156
156
156
156
156


Tablet







Weight 







(mg)







Coating 
8.754
9.447
9.403
8.717
8.902


Batch







Size (kg)









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag.
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press at 35,000 tph speed using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 24 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 8.754 kg (Example 13.1), 9.447 kg (Example 13.2), 9.403 kg (Example 13.3), 8.717 kg (Example 13.4), 8.902 kg (Example 13.5).
    8. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed into the pan directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the moving bed of tablets.
    9. The pan speed was set to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve a probe target temperature of 75° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 4) was initiated once the temperature probe indicated approximately 70° C. (Example 13.1 at 68.3° C. Example 13.2 at 69.9° C. Example 13.3 and 13.4 at 70.0° C., and Example 13.5 at 71.0° C.). Once the target probe temperature was achieved, the inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain this target probe temperature. The tablets were cured for 90 minutes. The pan speed was increased to 12 rpm at approximately 60 minutes of curing (except for Example 13.5, the pan speed was maintained at 7 rpm throughout curing). Samples were taken after 30 minutes, 60 minutes and 90 minutes of curing. The temperature profile of the curing processes for Examples 13.1 to 13.5 is presented in Tables 13.1.1 to 13.5.1 and in FIGS. 10 to 14.
    10. At the end of curing, magnesium stearate was added to the moving be of tablets as an anti-tacking agent. The amount of magnesium stearate added was 8.75 g (Example 13.1), 1.8887 g (Example 13.2), 1.8808 g (Example 13.3), 1.7400 g (Example 13.4), and 1.784 g (Example 13.5). The magnesium stearate was weighed in a weigh boat and was applied by manually dispensing (dusting) the powder across the moving tablet bed. The pan speed was continued at 12 rpm (Example 13.5 at 7 rpm) and the tablet bed was cooled by setting the inlet temperature to 21° C. The tablet bed was cooled to an exhaust temperature of <41° C.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 55° C. The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 43° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
    12. After film coating was completed, the pan speed was reduced (3 to 6 rpm) and the inlet temperature was set to 21° to 25° C. to cool the system, the airflow was maintained at the current setting.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests and density measurement was performed as follows:
Tablets cured for 30 minutes and 60 minutes, and tablets cured for 90 minutes and coated were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and non basic potassium phosphate buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours. Tablet dimensions and dissolution results corresponding to the respective curing time and temperature are presented in Tables 13.1.2 to 13.5.2.
Uncured tablets, cured tablets and cured, coated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 439 Newton using a Schleuniger Model 6D apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking or to a breaking strength test applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate the resistance to breaking.
The density of uncured tablets and tablets cured for different periods of time (30, 60 and 90 minutes samples) was determined by Archimedes principle, using a Top-loading Mettler Toledo balance Model #AB 135-S/FACT, Serial #1127430072 and a density determination kit 33360, according to the following procedure:

    1. Set-up the Mettler Toledo balance with the Density Determination Kit.
    2. Fill an appropriately sized beaker (200 ml) with hexane.
    3. Weigh the tablet in air and record the weight as Weight A.
    4. Transfer the same tablet onto the lower coil within the beaker filled with hexane.
    5. Determine the weight of the tablet in hexane and record the weight as Weight B.
    6. Perform the density calculation according to the equation






  
    ρ
    =
    
      
        A
        
          A
          -
          B
        
      
      ·
      
        ρ
        0
      
    
  
  ,




    
    
        wherein
        ρ: Density of the tablet
        A: Weight of the tablet in air
        B: Weight of the tablet when immersed in the liquid
        ρ0: Density of the liquid at a given temperature (density of hexane at
        20′C=0.660 g/ml (Merck Index)
    
    
    7. Record the density.

The reported density values are mean values of 3 tablets and all refer to uncoated tablets.



The results are presented in the following Tables.







TABLE 13.1.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 13.1













Total
Curing
Set inlet
Actual inlet
Probe
Exhaust



Time
time
temperature
temperature
temperature
temperature


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
27
26.9
26.8
25.7



10
—
75
74.9
59.5
56.8


15
0
85
84.8
68.3
65.5
Curing starts


20
5
85
84.7
71
68.4


26
11
85
84.8
72.8
70.1


30
15
85
84.8
74
70.9


45
30
83
83
74.8
74.7
30 min sample


55
40
81
81.2
74.8
76


61
46
81
81.2
74.7
75.9


65
50
81
81
74.8
75.8


70
55
81
81
74.7
75.8


75
60
81
81.1
75
75.9
60 min sample


85
70
81
81.1
74.6
75.8


95
80
81
81.1
74.8
75.9


105
90
81
80.9
74.9
76
End of curing,








90 min sample


112
—
21
35.3
49
55.6


128
—
21
33.4
32
—





1determined according to method 4,


2temperature measured at the inlet;


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 13.1.2









Example 13.1















30 min
60 min
90 min cure,




Uncured
cure
cure
coated




(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
153  
153  
152  
158  


Dimensions
(mg)







Thickness 
 4.63
 4.98
 4.89
 4.89



(mm)







Diameter 
 7.14
 7.00
 6.98
 6.98



(mm)







Breaking
 80  
  196 1 
  196 1 
  438 2 



strength 







(N)








n = 3
n = 3
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
 25 (9.5)
 24 (8.4)
 27 (7.3)


(%
 2 hr
—
 39 (7.7)
 39 (8.7)
 43 (6.6)


Released)
 4 hr
—
 62 (7.0)
 62 (5.8)
 67 (6.8)


SGF
 8 hr
—
 89 (4.7)
 91 (5.0)
 92 (2.9)



12 hr
—
100 (3.3) 
100 (3.6)
101 (2.4)





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.


2 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 438N.













TABLE 13.2.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 13.2













Total
Curing
Set inlet
Actual inlet
Probe
Exhaust



Time
time
temperature 
temperature
temperature
temperature



(min.) 
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
23
22.7
26.1
23.8



5
—
85
81
55.7
51.1



10
—
85
85.1
63.7
62.3



21
0
85
84.8
69.9
69.1
Curing starts


31
10
85
85.1
72.4
70.9



41
20
85
85.1
73.7
72.5



51
30
82
82
74.8
75.8
30 min sample


61
40
82
81.9
75
76.2



71
50
81
81
74.8
75.9



81
60
81
80.8
75
75.9
60 min sample


91
70
81
81
74.9
76



101
80
80.5
80.5
74.8
75.8



111
90
80.5
80.5
74.8
75.7
End of curing,








90 min sample


118
—
21
23.1
50
55.1



131
—
21
22.4
34.1
37.7





1determined according to method 4,


2temperature measured at the inlet;


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple),


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 13.2.2









Example 13.2















30 min
60 min
90 min cure,




Uncured
cure
cure
coated




(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
152  
153  
152  
157  


Dimen-
(mg)






sions
Thickness 
 4.69
 4.99
 4.90
 4.84



(mm)







Diameter 
 7.14
 6.98
 6.95
 6.95



(mm)







Breaking
 62  
  196 1 
  196 1 
  196 1 



strength 







(N)








n = 6
n = 6
n = 6





Dissolu-
 1 hr
—
 23 (10.6)
 22 (8.5)
25 (5.2)


tion
 2 hr
—
 38 (10.1)
 37 (7.7)
41 (4.6)


(%
 4 hr
—
 64 (9.5)
 61 (8.1)
65 (3.6)


Released)
 8 hr
—
 92 (6.8) 
 90 (4.6)
91 (2.4)


SGF
12 hr
—
100 (3.4)
100 (3.2)
99 (2.9)





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 13.3.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 13.3:













Total
Curing
Set inlet
Actual inlet
Probe
Exhaust



Time
time
temperature
temperature
temperature
temperature


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
25
24.9
27.8
26.2



5
—
90
85
58.2
53.9


10
—
90
89.8
67
65.1


13
 0
90
90.1
70
68.3
Curing starts


23
10
90
90
74.6
72.2


33
20
86
85.9
74.7
73.4


43
30
83
83.1
75.4
76.5
30 min sample


53
40
82
82.1
74.9
76.3


63
50
81.5
81.8
75
76.4


73
60
81.5
81.5
74.7
76.1
60 min sample


83
70
81.5
81.5
75
76.1


93
80
81.5
81.6
75
76.1


103
90
81.5
81.3
75
76.1
End of curing,








90 min sample


109
—
21
35.5
50
57.5


121
—
21
22.6
33.8
39.3





1determined according to method 4,


2temperature measured at the inlet;


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple),


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 13.3.2









Example 13.3















30 min
60 min
90 min cure,




Uncured
cure
cure
coated




(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
154  
154  
152  
160  


Dimensions
(mg)







Thickness 
 4.56
 4.85
 4.79
 4.77



(mm)







Diameter 
 7.13
 7.01
 6.96
 6.98



(mm)







Breaking
 83  
  196 1 
  196 1 
  196 1 



strength 







(N)








n = 6
n = 6
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
22 (5.8)
 26 (9.2)
 23 (5.7)


(%
 2 hr
—
37 (6.4)
 42 (8.6)
 39 (4.7)


Released)
 4 hr
—
61 (6.3)
 67 (6.3)
 64 (3.7)


SGF
 8 hr
—
90 (4.5)
 93 (3.3)
 92 (2.7)



12 hr
—
99 (3.1)
101 (2.2)
101 (1.8)





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 13.4.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 13.4:













Total
Curing
Set inlet
Actual inlet
Probe
Exhaust



Time
time
temperature
temperature
temperature
temperature


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
25
25
24.6
23.4



5
—
90
85
46.8
51


10
—
90
89.9
56.6
63.8


15
—
90
89.8
68.5
68.7


16
 0
90
90.1
70
69.5
Curing starts


26
10
90
90
73.6
72.9


36
20
86
86
75.4
76.8


46
30
84
84
75.4
77.2
30 min sample


56
40
83
82.9
75.1
76.8


66
50
82
81.4
74.8
76.6


76
60
82
81.7
74.7
76.3
60 min sample


86
70
82
82.1
75
76.3


96
80
82
82.1
75.1
76.3


106
90
82
82.1
75.1
76.4
End of curing,








90 min sample


112
—
21
33.8
55.9
50


126
—
21
22.1
31.6
34.6





1determined according to method 4,


2temperature measured at the inlet;


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple),


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 13.4.2









Example 13.4















30 min
60 min
90 min cure,




Uncured
cure
cure
coated




(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
150  
151  
150  
159  


Dimensions
(mg)







Thickness 
 4.43
 4.73
 4.67
 4.68



(mm)







Diameter 
 7.13
 7.00
 6.97
 7.00



(mm)







Breaking
 65  
  196 1 
  196 1 
  196 1 



strength







(N)









n = 6
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
29 (3.2)
 25 (7.9)
 24 (5.5)


(%
 2 hr
—
47 (3.1)
 42 (6.7)
 41 (5.2)


Released)
 4 hr
—
71 (2.4)
 67 (5.2)
 67 (6.2)


SGF
 8 hr
—
92 (2.5)
 92 (4.3)
 94 (3.2)



12 hr
—
99 (2.1)
100 (2.8)
101 (2.2)





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 13.5.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 13.5:













Total
Curing
Set inlet
Actual inlet
Probe
Exhaust



Time
time
temperature
temperature
temperature
temperature


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
80
69.2
39.8
35.6



10
—
90
80.2
64.9
65.6


20
0
90
90.2
70.9
71
Curing starts


25
5
90
89.9
71.7
72.4


30
10
90
90.1
72.8
73.4


35
15
85
87.1
74.1
76.1


50
30
85
85
75.2
77.5
30 min sample


60
40
83
83.2
74.7
76.8


80
60
83
83.1
75.1
76.5
60 min sample


90
70
83
83
75.3
76.6


100
80
80
79.1
74.4
76


110
90
80
80.1
73.6
74.7
End of curing,








90 min sample


115
—
21
39.6
55.6
59.4


120
—
21
24.5
41.5
45.2


125
—
21
23
37.7
40.7





1determined according to method 4,


2temperature measured at the inlet;


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple),


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 13.5.2









Example 13.5

















90 min




30 min
60 min
90 min
cure,



Uncured
cure
cure
cure
coated



(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)

















Tablet
Weight (mg)
156
157   
154   
153   
158   


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.45
4.66
4.57
4.52
4.51



Diameter (mm)
7.12
7.06
7.04
7.03
7.08



Breaking strength (N)
90
438 1    
438 1    
438 1    
438 1    



Relaxed diameter (mm)
—
4.57
4.68
4.69
4.67



post breaking strength



test (NLT 15 min relax



period)






n = 6

n = 6


Dissolution
1 hr
—
28 (5.0)
29 (5.9)
—
26 (1.4)


(%
2 hr
—
45 (5.2)
45 (5.6)
—
42 (1.4)


Released)
4 hr
—
69 (4.8)
70 (4.4)
—
68 (2.0)


SGF
8 hr
—
93 (4.2)
94 (4.0)
—
94 (4.0)



12 hr 
—
98 (3.9)
102 (5.2) 
—
99 (5.1)





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 438 N.















TABLE 13.6








Density (g/cm3)1
Density 














30 min
60 min
90 min
change after



Uncured
cure
cure
cure
curing (%)2





Example 13.1
1.172
1.131
1.134
1.137
−2.986


Example 13.2
1.174
1.137
1.137
1.140
−2.896


Example 13.3
1.179
1.151
1.152
1.152
−2.290


Example 13.4
1.182
1.167
1.168
1.172
−0.846


Example 13.5
1.222
1.183
1.183
1.187
−2.864





1The density value is a mean value of 3 tablets measured;


2The density change after curing corresponds to the observed density change in % of the tablets cured for 90 min in comparison to the uncured tablets.






Example 14
In Example 14, five different 156 mg tablets (Examples 14.1 to 143) including 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg of oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide, in a larger batch size compared to Example 13.
Compositions:
















Example
Example 
Example
Example
Example



14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5



mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit







Ingredient







Oxycodone 
 10
 15
 20
 30
 40


HCl







Polyethylene 
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5


oxide (MW: 







approximately







4,000,000;







Polyox TM







WSR-301)







Magnesium 
 1.5
 1.5
 1.5
 1 .5
 1.5


Stearate







Total Core 
150
150
150
150
150


Tablet Weight 







(mg)







Total Batch 
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg


size 







Coating







Opadry film 
 6
 6
 6
 6
 6


coating







Total Tablet 
156
156
156
156
156


Weight (mg)







Coating Batch 
 97.480
 98.808
 97.864
 99.511
 98.788


Size (kg)









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into a separate suitable container.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar) 10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 3 minutes with the I bar off.
    6. Step 5 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    7. Step 6 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 135,000 tph using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling.
    8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 97.480 kg (Example 14.1), 98.808 kg (Example 14.2), 97.864 kg (Example 14.3), 99.511 kg (Example 14.4) and 98.788 kg (Example 14.5).
    9. The pan speed was set to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve an inlet air temperature of 75° C. The tablets were cured at the target inlet temperature for 1 hour (Examples 14.1 to 14.5). The starting point used for the determination of the curing time according to method 1 was the point when the inlet temperature achieved the target temperature of 75° C. The temperature profile of the curing processes of Examples 14.1 to 14.5 is presented in Tables 14.1.1 to 14.5.1 and in FIGS. 15 to 19.
    10. The pan speed was continued at 7 rpm for Examples 14.2, 14.4 and 14.5. The pan speed was increased up to 10 rpm for Example 14.1 and up to 8 rpm for Example 14.3. For Examples 14.2 to 14.5, 20 g of magnesium stearate was added as an anti-tacking agent. The tablet bed was cooled by slowly lowering the exhaust temperature setting (Example 14.1) or by immediately setting the exhaust temperature setting to 25° C. (Example 14.2) or 30° C. (Examples 14.3 to 14.5). until a specific exhaust temperature of 30 to 34° C. was reached.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to target a 55° C. inlet temperature. The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature approached 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
    12. After coating was completed, the pan speed was set to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C., the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 27-30° C.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests and stability tests was performed as follows:
Tablets cured for 1 hour and coated were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and non basic potassium phosphate buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours. Tablet dimensions and dissolution results corresponding to the respective curing time and temperature are presented in Tables 14.1.2 to 14.5.2.
Uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 Apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40 CC/75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently testing the tablets in vitro as described above. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage, sample time points regarding dissolution test include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a further stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently subjecting the tablets to the assay test to determine the content of oxycodone HCl in the tablet samples. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the assay test, oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two sets of ten tablets each with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
Cured, coated tablets were subjected to a further stability test by storing them in 100 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity) for a certain period of time and subsequently subjecting the tablets to the oxycodone-N-oxide (ONO) test to determine the content of the degradation product oxycodone-N-oxide and unknown degradation products in percent by weight, relative to the oxycodone HCl label claim. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), one month, two months, three months and six months of storage. In the ONO test, oxycodone hydrochloride and its degradation products were extracted from a set of ten tablets with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 206 nm.
The density of uncured tablets, cured tablets and cured/coated tablets was determined as described for Example 13.
The results are presented in the following Tables.







TABLE 14.1.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 14.1
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
—
—
—
7
Load pan, start warming


20
—
65
57
56
7


21
—
65.0


7


28
—
70.0


7


30
—
72.0
64
63
7


36
0
75.0
65
65
7
Curing starts








0 min sample


43
7
73.2


7


46
10
73
67
67


51
15
72.2


7
15 min sample


56
20
71.8
67
67
8


66
30
75.0
68
68
8
30 min sample


76
40
73.0
68
68
8


81
45
74.8


8
45 min sample


86
50
74.3
69
69
8


92
56
72.3


8


96
60
71.0
69
69
8
End of curing, 60 min








sample, Mg stearate not used,








start cool down, tablet flow








was sticky


101
—
62.0


8
Tablet flow starting to get








chunky


104
—
59.2


9
Flow very chunky (tablet bed








“sheeting”)


106
—
57
62
62
10


109
—
54.9


9
Tablet flow still slightly








chunky, but better


110
—
53.2


8
Back to normal tablet flow


116
—
48.0
58
58
8


126
—
29.0
30
46
7


132
—
24.0
30
33
7





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 14.1.2









Example 14.1














60 min 
60 min cure,





cure
coated




Uncured
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
150
150  
158  


Dimensions
(mg)
(n = 120)





Thickness 
4.42 
 4.71
 4.75



(mm)
(n = 5)





Diameter 
7.14 
 7.05
 7.07



(mm)
(n = 5)





Breaking
68





strength
(n = 100)
  196 1 
  196 1 



(N)









n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
—
 25


(%
 2 hr
—
—
 42


Released)
 4 hr
—
—
 67


SGF
 8 hr
—
—
 94



12 hr
—
—
101





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 14.1.3







Stability tests Example 14.1, storage at 25° C./60% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
25
24
24
23
23


(% Released)
2 hr
42
40
38
38
39


(n = 6
4 hr
67
64
61
61
64


SGF
8 hr
94
90
87
89
90



12 hr 
101
99
94
100
97


Assay test
Assay 1
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.7


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
9.8
9.9
9.8
9.9
9.8


HCl)
Average
9.8
9.8
9.8
9.9
9.8


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.1.4







Stability tests Example 14.1, storage at 40° C./75% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
25
25
25
24
23


(% Released)
2 hr
42
—
41
38
39


(n = 6)
4 hr
67
66
63
62
64


SGF
8 hr
94
—
89
88
90



12 hr 
101
100
96
98
96


Assay test
Assay 1
9.8
9.8
9.7
9.6
9.8


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
9.8
10.0
9.7
9.8
9.8


HCl)
Average
9.8
9.9
9.7
9.7
9.8


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.2.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 14.2
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
18
50
20
7
Load pan, start warming


1
—
41.0


7


5
—

50.0
62.0


8
—
67.7
51.0
50.5
7
Slowly adjusting exhaust set


10
—
71
56
55


14
0
75.0
61.7
61.9
7
curing starts, 0 min sample


19
5
77.2
61.7
64.8
7


21
7
77.8


7
High inlet, then dropped to 71° C.


24
10
68.9
65.3
65.3
7


29
15
70.6
66.1
65.5
7
15 min sample


33
19
72.6


7


34
20
73.6
67.0
66.3
7


36
22
75.0


7


39
25
75.9
67.0
67.3
7


44
30
73.3
67.0
67.4
7
30 min sample


49
35
70.1
67.2
67.0
7


54
40
71.7
67.5
67.3
7
Couple of tablets sticking at








pan support arms, no








permanent stick


59
45
74.3
68.0
67.9
7
45 min sample


64
50
75
68
68
7


66
52
73.6
68.0
68.2
7


69
55
72.4
68.0
68.1
7


74
60
73.0
68
68
7
End of curing, 60 min








sample, add 20 g Mg stearate,








tablet flow was slightly sticky








(based on visual cascade








flow), flow instantly improved








after adding Mg stearate


75
—
73
25
68
7
Normal tablet flow observed


78
—
44.7
25
62.3
7
during cool down


81
—
36.8
25
57.4
7


84
—
31.8
25
54.6
7


85
—
30
25
53
7


94
—
23
25
33
7





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 14.2.2









Example 14.2














60 min 
60 min cure,





cure
coated




Uncured
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
150
149  
156  


Dimensions
(mg)
(n = 120)





Thickness 
4.38 
 4.68
 4.70



(mm)
(n = 5)





Diameter 
7.13 
 7.07
 7.09



(mm)
(n = 5)





Breaking
70
  196 1 
  196 1 



strength 
(n = 100)





(N)









n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
—
 23


(%
 2 hr
—
—
 39


Released)
 4 hr
—
—
 64


SGF
 8 hr
—
—
 93



12 hr
—
—
100





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 14.2.3







Stability tests Example 14.2, storage at 25° C./60% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
23
24
26
22
24


(% Released)
2 hr
39
40
41
37
40


(n = 6)
4 hr
64
65
65
61
65


SGF
8 hr
93
91
90
90
91



12 hr 
100
100
97
99
99


Assay test
Assay 1
14.6
14.9
14.6
14.7
14.8


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
14.8
14.9
14.7
14.8
14.9


HCl)
Average
14.7
14.9
14.7
14.7
14.8


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.2.4







Stability tests Example 14.2, storage at 40° C./75% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
23
25
26
22
24


(% Released)
2 hr
39
41
42
36
40


(n = 6)
4 hr
64
66
66
58
65


SGF
8 hr
93
94
92
87
91



12 hr 
100
102
97
97
98


Assay test
Assay 1
14.6
14.8
14.7
14.6
14.9


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
14.8
14.8
14.7
14.5
14.7


HCl)
Average
14.7
14.8
14.7
14.5
14.8


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.3.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 14.3
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
17.1
50
18
7
Load pan, start warming


5
—
61.0
50
42.5
7


10
—
70.2
56
55.8
7


15
0
75.0
61.6
61.9
7
Curing starts, 0 min sample


20
5
78.5
62.8
65.4
7


22
7
79.0
62.8
66.3
7
Inlet high


25
10
69.7
65.6
65.6
7


30
15
68.4
66.0
65.3
7
15 min sample


35
20
72.4
66.7
66.1
7


40
25
75.6
67.5
67.3
7


45
30
76.9
68.0
67.9
7
30 min sample


55
40
73.0
68.4
68.2
7


60
45
73.9
68.6
68.4
7
45 min sample


65
50
75
68.9
68.8
7


68
53
—
—
—
7
Couple of tablets (1-4)








sticking at pan support arms,








good tablet flow


70
55
76.2
69.6
69.6
8


75
60
77.0
70.5
70.8
8
End of curing, 60 min








sample, add 20 g Mg stearate,








tablet flow instantly improved


76
—
76
30
71
8
Normal tablet flow observed


79
—
43.9
30
60.6
8
during cool down


85
—
31.1
30
54.1
8
No sticking


86
—
30
30
53
8


96
—
23
30
33
8





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 14.3.2









Example 14.3














60 min 
60 min cure,





cure
coated




Uncured
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet
Weight 
150
150  
156  


Dimensions
(mg)
(n = 120)





Thickness 
4.38 
 4.69
 4.67



(mm)
(n = 5)





Diameter 
7.14 
 7.08
 7.10



(mm)
(n = 5)





Breaking
64
  196 1 
  196 1 



strength 
(n = 110)





(N)









n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
—
24


(%
 2 hr
—
—
41


Released)
 4 hr
—
—
66


SGF
 8 hr
—
—
92



12 hr
—
—
98





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196N.













TABLE 14.3.3







Stability tests Example 14.3, storage at 25° C./60% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
24
25
22
24
21


(% Released)
2 hr
41
42
38
40
38


(n = 6)
4 hr
66
69
61
66
63


SGF
8 hr
92
96
89
91
88



12 hr 
98
102
97
99
96


Assay test
Assay 1
19.6
19.4
19.5
19.4
19.8


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
19.4
19.3
19.4
19.4
19.4


HCl)
Average
19.5
19.4
19.4
19.4
19.6


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.3.4







Stability tests Example 14.3, storage at 40° C./75% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
24
27
24
23
22


(% Released)
2 hr
41
44
40
39
40


(n = 6)
4 hr
66
70
63
63
65


SGF
8 hr
92
94
90
89
90



12 hr 
98
102
98
98
98


Assay test
Assay 1
19.6
19.3
19.6
19.3
19.7


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
19.4
19.3
19.7
19.4
19.4


HCl)
Average
19.5
19.3
19.6
19.4
19.6


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.4.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 14.4

















Set
Actual



Total
Curing
Inlet
Bed
exhaust
exhaust


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
temp.


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)
(° C.)4
Comments5
















0





Load pan, start warming


3

63.0
46.5
50.0
41.2


5

66.7
49.9
50.0
48.0


10
0
75.0
60.5
60.0
59.0
curing starts, 0 min sample


14
4
78.4
65.2
61.5
63.6


15
5
79.1
66.0
61.5
64.5


20
10
67.6
66.2
63.0
64.7


24
15
69.2
66.7
65.7
64.9
15 min sample


28
19
73.0
67.8
66.4
65.8


29
20
73.5
68.0
67.0
66.0


32
23
75.6
69.0
67.0
66.7


34
25
75.9
69.4
67.0
67.0


39
30
76.5
70.2
67.7
67.7
30 min sample


44
35
76.8
70.8
68.2
68.2


47
38
76.7
71.0
68.8
68.4
Couple of tablets sticking at pan








support arms, no permanent








sticking


49
40
77.4
71.0
69.3
68.7


52
43
78.7
71.5
69.5
69.2


54
45
79.1
72.1
70.0
69.5
45 min sample


58
49
—
73.3
—
—


59
50
81.0
73.8
70.1
70.8


65
56
73.0
74.1
71.7
71.5


69
60
74.0
74.5
71.7
71.3
End of curing, 60 min sample,








add 20 g Mg stearate, start cool








down, tablet flow slightly sticky








(based on visual cascade flow),








still couple of tablets sticking at








support arms, flow/cascade








instantly improved after adding








Mg stearate


72
—
48.9
65.3
30.0
65.3
Normal tablet flow observed


75
—
39.7
58.6
30.0
56.8
during cool down


79
—
33.2
56.4
30.0
54.6


84
—
27.7
50.0
30.0
48.4





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3tablet bed temperature, i.e. temperature of extended release matrix formulations, measured with an IR gun,


4temperature measured at the exhaust,


5The pan speed was 7 rpm throughout the curing process.















TABLE 14.4.2









Example 14.4















60 min cure,





60 min cure
coated




Uncured
(n = 5)
(n = 5)














Tablet
Weight (mg)
150
149
157


Dimensions 

(n = 120)





Thickness (mm)
4.34 (n = 5)
4.60
4.63



Diameter (mm)
7.14 (n = 5)
7.09
7.14



Breaking
61
196 1
196 1



strength (N)
(n = 100)








n = 6


Dissolution
 1 hr
—
—
22


(%
 2 hr
—
—
39


Released)
 4 hr
—
—
66


SGF
 8 hr
—
—
94



12 hr
—
—
100





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 N.













TABLE 14.4.3







Stability tests Example 14.4, storage at 25° C./60% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
22
23
24
24
23


(% Released)
2 hr
39
39
39
41
40


(n = 6)
4 hr
66
64
63
68
65


SGF
8 hr
94
91
88
93
91



12 hr 
100
98
96
99
98


Assay test
Assay 1
28.8
28.8
28.4
28.8
29.2


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
29.1
29.0
28.8
28.8
29.2


HCl)
Average
29.0
28.9
28.6
28.8
29.2


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.4.4







Stability tests Example 14.4, storage at 40° C./75% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
22
26
24
24
24


(% Released)
2 hr
39
44
41
41
41


(n = 6)
4 hr
66
70
64
67
67


SGF
8 hr
94
93
88
92
93



12 hr 
100
99
96
98
98


Assay test
Assay 1
28.8
29.3
28.2
29.0
28.4


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
29.1
29.3
28.1
28.9
28.6


HCl)
Average
29.0
29.3
28.1
28.9
28.5


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.5.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 14.5

















Set
Actual



Total
Curing
Inlet
Bed
exhaust
exhaust


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
temp.


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)
(° C.)4
Comments5
















0
—
16.6
30
60.0
19.7
Load pan, start warming


1
—
—
32
60.0
—


4
—
56.8
39.8
60.0
36.7


5
—
60.1
43.9
60.0
40.4


8
—
66.8
52.5
60.0
49.4


10
—
69.1
56.9
60.0
53.8


13
—
71.7
61.3
60.0
58.8


15
—
73.3
63.5
61.0
60.8


17
0
75.0
65.3
63.0
62.5
Curing starts, 0 min sample


21
4
77.7
67.3
66.0
65.0


23
6
78.8
68.1
67.0
65.9


25
8
79.9
69.3
67.0
66.7


27
10
80.9
69.5
67.0
67.3


30
13
82.4
70.1
67.0
68.2


32
15
83.1
70.8
70.0
68.7
15 min sample


37
20
80.9
72.4
70.4
69.4


38
21
80.9
71.8
71.0
69.5


42
25
82.5
73.1
72.0
70.4
Good tablet flow and cascade


45
28
84.2
76.6
71.0
72.2


47
30
82.7
77.6
72.2
74.1
30 min sample


49
32
72.9
74.7
72.2
73.2


52
35
71.2
73.8
72.2
71.4
Tablet flow slightly sticky, 1-2








tablets sticking at support arms


56
39
75.4
74.7
72.2
71.5


57
40
75.9
74.7
72.2
71.9


60
43
76.9
75.5
72.2
72.8


62
45
75.4
75.3
72.2
72.9
45 min sample


66
49
73.4
74.5
72.2
71.8
Tablet flow slightly sticky, 1-2








tablets sticking at support arms








(not permanent sticking)


69
52
75.0
75.1
72.2
71.9


72
55
75.8
75.4
72.2
72.4


74
57
74.8
74.8
72.2
72.5


77
60
73.9
74.9
72.2
72.2
End of curing, 60 min sample,








add 20 g Mg stearate, instantly








improved flow/cascade start cool








down, no sticking at pan support








arms,


80
—
46.8
64.9
30.0
64.7
Cooling


—
—
—
—
30.0
—
2 tablets sticking at support arms








(not permanent sticking)


82
—
40.3
58.6
30.0
57.4
Tablets still appear bouncy, no








sticking observed


84
—
35.8
57.4
30.0
55.6
Normal tablet flow observed


86
—
32.5
55.9
30.0
54.2
during cool down period.


87
—
30.3
54.1
30.0
52.8
Continue cooling to exhaust


89
—
28.8
51.8
30.0
51.3
temperature of 30-34° C. for


91
—
26.9
47.2
30.0
47.9
coating start-up


97
—
—
~29
30.0
—
Top of bed 30.3° C., bottom of








bed 28.5° C.





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3tablet bed temperature, i.e. temperature of extended release matrix formulations, measured with an IR gun,


4temperature measured at the exhaust,


5The pan speed was 7 rpm throughout the curing process.















TABLE 14.5.2









Example 14.5















60 min cure,





60 min cure
coated




Uncured
(n = 5)
(n = 5)














Tablet
Weight (mg)
150
149
155


Dimensions

(n = 120)





Thickness (mm)
4.30 (n = 5)
4.49
4.52



Diameter (mm)
7.15 (n = 5)
7.10
7.15



Breaking
55
196 1
196 1



strength (N)
(n = 110)








n = 6


Dissolution
 1 hr
—
—
24


(%
 2 hr
—
—
41


Released)
 4 hr
—
—
68


SGF
 8 hr
—
—
93



12 hr
—
—
98





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 N.













TABLE 14.5.3







Stability tests Example 14.5, storage at 25° C./60% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
24
25
27
23
25


(% Released)
2 hr
41
43
44
40
43


(n = 6)
4 hr
68
69
69
66
69


SGF
8 hr
93
94
93
89
92



12 hr 
98
98
97
96
96


Assay test
Assay 1
37.8
38.4
36.9
37.6
39.2


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
37.9
37.6
36.5
38.1
39.2


HCl)
Average
37.8
38.0
36.7
37.9
39.2


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.













TABLE 14.5.4







Stability tests Example 14.5, storage at 40° C./75% RH









Storage time













Initial
1 month
2 months
3 months
6 months

















Dissolution
1 hr
24
26
27
25
25


(% Released)
2 hr
41
—
45
42
43


(n = 6)
4 hr
68
71
72
68
69


SGF
8 hr
93
—
95
93
92



12 hr 
98
97
98
99
95


Assay test
Assay 1
37.8
38.3
37.3
37.6
37.9


(mg oxycodone
Assay 2
37.9
38.6
36.9
37.6
38.1


HCl)
Average
37.8
38.5
37.1
37.6
38.0


Degradation
oxycodone N-oxide
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1


products test
(%)1



Each individual
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



unknown (%)1



Total degradation
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1
≦0.1



products (%)1





1relative to the label claim of oxycodone HCl.
















TABLE 14.6








Density (g/cm3)
Density 
Density change















Cured 
change
after curing and



Un-

and
after
coating



cured
Cured
Coated
curing (%)
(%)















Example 14.1
1.186
1.145
1.138
−3.457
−4.047


Example 14.2
1.184
1.152
1.129
−2.703
−4.645


Example 14.3
1.183
1.151
1.144
−2.705
−3.297


Example 14.4
1.206
1.162 
1.130
−3.648
−6.302


Example 14.5
1.208
1.174
1.172
−2.815
−2.980









Example 15
In Example 15, two different Oxycodone HCl tablet formulations were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. One formulation at 234 mg tablet weight (Example 15.1) with 60 mg of Oxycodone HCl and one formulation at 260 mg tablet weight (Example 15.2) with 80 mg of Oxycodone HCl.
Compositions:













Example 15.1
Example 15.2



mg/unit
mg/unit

















Ingredient




Oxycodone HCl
60
80


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
162.75
167.5


4,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-301)




Magnesium Stearate
2.25
2.50


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
225
250


Total Batch size
10 kg
10 kg


Coating




Opadry film coating
9
10


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
234
260


Coating Batch Size (kg)
8.367
8.205









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride (screened through a 20-mesh screen)
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender (screened through a 20-mesh screen).
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag (note: two 5 kg blends were prepared to provide 10 kgs of tablet blend for compression).
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press at 35,000 tph speed using 3⁄8 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling. A sample of tablet cores was taken.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 24 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 8.367 kg (Example 15.1) and 8.205 kg (Example 15.2).
    8. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed into the pan directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the cascading bed of tablets.
    9. The pan speed was set to 10 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve an exhaust target temperature of 72° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved 72° C. The inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were cured for 15 minutes. The pan speed was maintained at 10 rpm. The temperature profile of the curing processes for Examples 15.1 and 15.2 is presented in Tables 15.1.1 and 15.2.1.
    10. The pan speed was continued at 10 rpm. The inlet temperature was set to 22° C. and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of 30.0° C. was achieved. A sample of cured tablets was taken at the end of cooling.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 53° C. The filmcoating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 41° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The pan speed was increased up to 20 rpm during filmcoating.
    12. After filmcoating was completed, the pan speed was reduced and the inlet temperature was set to 22° C. the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the system cooled to an exhaust temperature of <30° C. A sample of cured/coated tablets was taken.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests was performed as follows:
Core tablets (uncured), 15 minute cured tablets and cured/coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket with a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 12.0 and 16.0 hours.
Core tablets (uncured), 15 minute cured tablets and cured/coated tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Tables 15.1.2 to 15.2.2.







TABLE 15.1.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 15.1










Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
22 to 85
47.4
—
26.4
Start heating


10
—
85
81.3
66.3
62.0


20
—
85
84.8
73.7
70.4
Good tablet flow, no sticking


25.5
0
85 to 74
85.0
75.1
72.0
Start of curing; 74° C. inlet set too








low, exhaust dropped to 70.9° C.,








reset inlet to 80° C.


30.5
5
80
80.0
73.6
71.9
Good tablet flow, no sticking


35.5
10
75
75.8
72.2
73.3
Good tablet flow, no sticking


40.5
15
73 to 22
72.8
70.6
71.9
End of curing, good tablet flow, no








sticking, start cooling


60
—
22
21.5
27.9
31.4


61
—
22
22.0
27.2
29.7
End cooling, no sticking observed








during cool down, good tablet








flow, take cured tablet sample





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.

















TABLE 15.1.2











Example 15.1















Uncured 
15 min cure
Coated





n = 3
n = 3
n = 6

















Dissolution
 1 hr
28
28
24



(% Released)
 2 hr
44
44
41



SGF
 4 hr
69
69
67




 6 hr
85
85
84




 8 hr
95
95
93




12 hr
102
102
99




16 hr
104
103
102

















TABLE 15.2.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 15.2










Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
22 to 80
23.3
27.7
25.5
Start heating


10
—
80
77.0
62.2
60.4


20
—
80
80.0
70.1
68.4
Good tablet flow, no sticking


30
—
80
80.1
72.5
70.6
Good tablet flow, no sticking


35
0
80
79.9
73.6
72.0
Start of curing;








good tablet flow, no sticking


38
3
—
—
—
72.7
Maximum exhaust temp


40
5
74
73.5
71.8
72.3


45
10
74
73.9
71.9
72.3
Good tablet flow, no sticking


50
15
74 to 22
74.2
72.0
72.4
End of curing, start cooling


71
—
22
21.7
28.4
30.0
End cooling, no sticking observed








during cool down, good tablet








flow, take cured tablet sample





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 15.2.2









Example 15.2













Uncured
15 min cure
Coated




(n = 25)
(n = 5)
(n = 5)





Tablet 
Weight (mg)
254
250
257


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.20
4.28
4.29



Breaking strength (N)
92
196 1
194 2







n = 3
n = 3
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
26
28
25


(% Released)
 2 hr
43
42
39


SOF
 4 hr
65
67
64



 6 hr
83
83
82



 8 hr
92
94
92



12 hr
101
102
100



16 hr
104
103
102





1 maximum force of the hardness tester, the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 N.


2 Four of the tablets did not break when subjected to the maximum force of 196 N, one tablet provided a breaking strength of 185 N (average of sample, n = 5, 194 N).






Example 16
In Example 16, two different Oxycodone HCl tablet formulations were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. One formulation at 234 mg tablet weight (Example 16.1) with 60 mg of Oxycodone HCl and one formulation at 260 mg tablet weight (Example 16.2) with 80 mg of Oxycodone HCl. The formulations manufactured at a larger batch size compared to Example 15.
Compositions:













Example 16.1
Example 16.2



mg/unit
mg/unit







Ingredient




Oxycodone HCl
60
80


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
162.75
167.5


4,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-301, LEO)




Magnesium Stearate
2.25
2.50


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
225
250


Total Batch size
100 kg
100 kg


Coating




Opadry film coating
9
10


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
234
260


Coating Batch Size (kg)
94.122
93.530









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The Oxycodone HCl and magnesium stearate were passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into separate suitable containers.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 2 minutes with the I bar off.
    6. Step 5 blend was charged into clean, tared, stainless steel containers.
    7. Step 6 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 135,000 tph speed using 3⁄8 inch standard round, concave embossed tooling, and a compression force of 16.5 kN for Example 16.1 and a compression force of 16.0 kN for Example 16.2. A sample of core tablets was taken.
    8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 94.122 kg (Example 16.1) and 93.530 kg (Example 16.2).
    9. The pan speed was set to 7 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve an exhaust temperature of 72° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved 72° C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 15 minutes. The temperature profile of the curing processes of Examples 16.1 and 16.2 is presented in Tables 16.1.1 and 16.2.1.
    10. The pan speed was continued at 7 rpm. The exhaust temperature was set to 25° C. and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of 30° C. was achieved.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust setting of 30 to 38° C. The filmcoating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved 40° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The pan speed was maintained at 7 rpm during filmcoating.
    12. After filmcoating was completed, the pan speed was reduced to 1.5 rpm and the exhaust temperature was set to 27° C., the airflow was maintained at the current setting and the tablet bed cooled to an exhaust temperature of <30° C.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests was performed as follows:
Coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket with a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0, and 12.0 hours.
Uncured tablets were subjected to weight, thickness and hardness tests on-line by Key Checkweigher.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Tables 16.1.2 to 16.2.2.







TABLE 16.1.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 16.1










Temperature














Total
Curing

IR
Exhaust




Time
time
Inlet
gun
set
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
34
32
65
24
Start heating


5
—
82
54
65
49


10
—
89
68
65
63


11
—
—
—
72
—


15
—
91
71
72
67


20
—
91
75
72
70


21
0
92
79
72
72
Start curing


26
5
90
85
70
79


30
9
63
—
—
—


31
10
69
74
72
69


36
15
80
78
72
72


37
16
80
77
72 to 25
73
End of curing, good tablet flow, no








sticking, start cooling


42
—
31
57
25
54


47
—
25
50
25
49


52
—
22
36
25
36


57
—
22
26
25
29
End cooling, no sticking observed








during cool down, good tablet flow





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using an IR gun


4temperature measured at the exhaust.
















TABLE 16.1.2










Example 16.1














Uncured






(n = 70)
Coated
















Tablet 
Weight (mg)
224.6
—



Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.77
—




Breaking strength (Kp)
5.7
—






n = 6



Dissolution
 1 hr
—
24



(% Released)
 2 hr
—
41



SGF
 4 hr
—
67




 8 hr
—
93




12 hr
—
99

















TABLE 16.2.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 16.2










Temperature














Total
Curing

IR
Exhaust




Time
time
Inlet
gun
set
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
26
22
20
23



2
—
—
—
20 to 65
—
Start heating


7
—
84
61
65
56


12
—
89
69
65
65


13.5
—
90
—
66
66


14.5
—
89
—
67
67


16.5
—
—
—
68
67


17
—
90
72
68
68


19
—
91
73
68
69


20
—
91
—
68
70


21
—
—
—
68
71


22
0
91
77
68
72
Start curing


24
2
90
81
70
75


24.5
2.5
—
—
70
76


25
3
90
—
72
77


26
4
90
—
72
78


27.5
5.5
—
—
72
79


28
6
82
83
72
78
Good tablet flow, no sticking


32
10
65
73
72
69


33
11
—
—
—
68


35
13
79
74
72
70


37
15
81
76
72 to 25
72
End of curing, good tablet flow, no








sticking, start cooling


42
—
32
56
25
54


47
—
25
50
25
48
good tablet flow, no sticking


52
—
22
36
25
36


56
—
21
29
25
30
End cooling, no sticking observed








during cool down, good tablet flow





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using an IR gun


4temperature measured at the exhaust.

















TABLE 16.2.2











Example 16.2














Uncured






(n = 60)
Coated
















Tablet 
Weight (mg)
250.8
—



Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.05
—




Breaking strength (Kp)
6.8







n = 6



Dissolution
 1 hr
—
22



(% Released)
 2 hr
—
37



SGF
 4 hr
—
62




 8 hr
—
89




12 hr
—
97










Example 17
In Example 17, two Oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 60 mg of Oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide. Example 17.1 is the same formulation as presented in Example 15.1. The second formulation (Example 17.2) contains 0.1% of butylated hydroxytoluene. Each tablet formulation was cured at the target exhaust temperature of 72° C. and 75° C. for 15 minutes, followed by filmcoating, and then an additional curing step at the target exhaust temperature for 30 minutes.
Compositions:













Example 17.1
Example 17.2



mg/unit
mg/unit







Ingredient




Oxycodone HCl
60
60


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
162.75
162.525


4,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-301)




Butylated Hydroxytoluene (BHT)
0
0.225


Magnesium Stearate
2.25
2.25


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
225
225


Total Batch size
5 kg
10 kg


Coating




Opadry film coating
9
9


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
234
234


Coating Batch Size (kg)
2 kg at 72° C.
6 kg at 72° C.



2 kg at 75° C.
2 kg at 75° C.









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride (screened through a 20-mesh screen)
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag (note: two 5 kg blends were prepared for Example 17.2 to provide 10 kgs of tablet blend for compression).
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press at 30,000 tph speed using 3⁄8 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling. Example 17.1 was compressed at a compression force at 12 kN and Example 17.2 at 6 kN, 12 kN and 18 kN.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 15 inch (for 2 kg batch size) or a 24 inch (for 6 kg batch size) Accela-Coat coating pan.
    8. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed into the pan directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the cascading bed of tablets.
    9. The pan speed was set at 7 or 10 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve an exhaust target temperature of 72° C. or 75° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved target. The inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were cured for 15 minutes. The pan speed was maintained at the current rpm. The temperature profile of the curing processes for Examples 17.1 and 17.2 is presented in Tables 17.1.1 and 17.2.1.
    10. The pan speed was continued at the current rpm. The inlet temperature was set to 20° or 22° C. and the tablet bed was cooled until an exhaust temperature of approximately 30° C. was achieved. NOTE: Magnesium Stearate was not used.
    11. The tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 52°-54° C. The filmcoating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 39°-42° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved. The pan speed was increased to 15 or 20 rpm during filmcoating.
    12. After filmcoating was completed, the pan speed was reduced to the level used during curing. The tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve the exhaust target temperature of 72° C. or 75° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved target. The inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The coated tablets were cured for an additional 30 minutes. The pan speed was maintained at the current rpm. The temperature profile of the additional curing process for Examples 17.1 and 17.2 is presented in Tables 17.1.1 and 17.2.1.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests was performed as follows:
Core tablets (uncured), cured tablets and cured/coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket with a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 12.0 and 16.0 hours.
Uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Tables 17.1.2 to 17.2.2.










TABLE 17.1.1









Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments










Curing process at 72° C. for Example 17.1













0
—
22 to 80
25.5
28.4
28.5
Start heating


10
—
80
80.2
69.6
68.1


19
0
80 to 78
80.0
73.2
72.0
Start of curing


24
5
78
77.9
73.2
73.0


29
10
75
75.0
71.8
72.3


34
15
75
75.0
72.3
72.0
End of curing, start cooling


50
—
22
22.8
28.2
29.2
End cooling, ready to coat







Apply 4% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
48 to 80
47.8
45.1
43.1
Start heating for additional curing


5
—
80
80.0
68.7
64.9


13
0
80 to 76
80.1
73.2
72.0
Start additional curing


28
15
75
74.9
72.0
72.4
15 minute additional curing


43
30
74 to 22
74.0
71.5
72.1
30 minute additional curing, start








cooling


55
—
22
24.6
32.2
34
End cooling, discharge







Curing process at 75° C. for Example 17.1













0
—
42 to 80
42.1
38.6
38.5
Start heating


18
—
80 to 83
80.1
73.0
72.4


21
0
82
81.5
75.1
75.0
Start of curing


26
5
77
76.6
73.5
74.7


31
10
  77.5
77.4
73.8
75.0


36
15
77.5 to 22  
77.6
74.1
75.2
End of curing, start cooling


53
—
22
23.1
29.5
29.6
End cooling, ready to coat







Apply 4% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
48 to 83
48.1
44.4
41.5
Start heating for additional curing


12
0
83
83.1
75.1
75.0
Start additional curing


27
15
78
78.11
74.4
75.4
15 minute additional curing


42
30
76.5 to 22  
76.5
73.9
74.9
30 minute additional curing, start








cooling


56
—
22
23.9
30.3
30.0
End cooling, discharge





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 17.1.2









Example 17.1













Uncured






(n = 25)





Tablet
Weight (mg)
225
—
—


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.86
—
—



Breaking strength (N)
75
—
—








Example 17.1
Example 17.1





cured at 72° C.
cured at 75° C.
















15 min

15 min






cure
Coated
cure
Coated




n = 3
n = 3
n = 6
n = 3
n = 3





Dissolution
1 hr
27
27
26
28
26


(% Released)
2 hr
44
42
41
44
42


SGF
4 hr
68
67
66
69
67



6 hr
83
83
84
85
83



8 hr
93
92
93
95
93



12 hr 
99
100
100
100
98



16 hr 
100
102
102
102
99



















TABLE 17.2.1









Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments










Curing process at 72° C. for Example 17.2













0
—
80
34.8
33.8
32.1
Pan load 6 kg; start heating


10
—
80
76.5
64.5
63.3


20
—
80
80.1
71.1
69.9


27.5
0
80
80.3
73.0
72.0
Start of curing


32.5
5
73.0
73.3
71.0
73.3


37.5
10
72.5
72.7
70.2
71.8


42.5
15
73.6 to 22  
73.5
70.6
72.1
End of curing, start cooling


61
—
22
22.7
30.1
30
End cooling, ready to coat







Apply 4% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
80 to 53
53
—
39.5
Start heating for additional curing


15
—
80
79.9
72.3
69.7


18
0
80
79.9
74.1
72.0
Start additional curing


33
15
73.5
73.4
70.9
72.3
15 minute additional curing


48
30
73.5
73.5
71.4
72.5
30 minute additional curing, start cooling


64
—
23.0
23.9
—
30.0
End cooling, discharge







Curing process at 75° C. for Example 17.2













0
—
82
52.9
53
48.4
Pan load 2 kg, start heating


12
—
82
82.2
75.4
72.8


16
—
82 to 85
72.6
70.0
69.7


23.5
0
85 to 82
81.8
76.4
75.0
Start of curing


26.5
3
82 to 80
81.8
77.2
77.0


32
8.5
78
80.1
76.8
77.1


38.5
15
78
78
75.6
76.1
End of curing, start cooling


53
—
20
32.4
30.0
32.1
End cooling, ready to coat







Apply 4% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
53.5 to 83  
53.7
—
46.5
Start heating for additional curing


—
0
83
83
73.7
75
Start additional curing


—
15
78
77.9
74.3
75.9
15 minute additional curing


—
23
78
78
75.1
76.3


—
30
78 to 22
78
75.1
76.4
30 minute additional curing, start








cooling


—
—
22
23.6
31.0
32.1
End cooling (15 minutes of








cooling), discharge





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 17.2.2









Example 17.2




Uncured core tablets (n = 5)













Compression force (kN)
6
12
18
12





Tablet
Weight (mg)
226
227
227
226


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
3.93
3.87
3.86
3.91



Breaking strength (N)
43
71
83
72
















Example 17.2 cured at




Example 17.2 cured at
75° C. (2 kg batch)














72° C. (6 kg batch)
Uncured
15 min





15 min cure, coated
(core)
cure
Coated









Compression force (kN)












6
12
18
12
















n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3





Dissolution
1 hr
25
23
23
26
27
24


(% Released)
2 hr
41
39
37
41
43
40


SGF
4 hr
65
64
59
64
66
64


No spring
6 hr
80
81
75
79
81
80



8 hr
90
91
86
88
91
90



12 hr 
98
100
97
99
101
100


Dissolution
1 hr

26
24


(% Released)
2 hr

42
40


SGF
4 hr

66
66


Basket with
6 hr

83
83


spring
8 hr

93
92



12 hr 

100
98



16 nr 

102
101









Example 18
In Example 18, four different Oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 80 mg of Oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide at a tablet weight of 250 mg. Two of the formulations (Examples 18.2 and 18.3) contained 0.1% of butylated hydroxytoluene. One of the formulations (Example 18.4) contained 0.5% of butylated hydroxytoluene. Three of the formulations (Examples 18.1, 18.2, and 18.4) contained 1% of magnesium stearate. One of the formulations (Example 18.3) contained 0.5% of magnesium stearate.
Compositions:















Example
Example
Example
Example



18.1
18.2
18.3
18.4



mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit







Ingredient






Oxycodone HCl
80
80
80
80



(32%)
  (32%)
  (32%)
  (32%)


Polyethylene oxide (MW: 
167.5
167.25
166.25
166.25


approximately 4,000,000; 
(67%)
(66.9%)
(67.4%)
(66.5%)


Polyox TM WSR-301)






Butylated 
0
0.25
0.15
1.25


Hydroxytoluene (BHT)

 (0.1%)
 (0.1%)
 (0.5%)


Magnesium Stearate
2.5
2.5
1.25
2.5



 (1%)
  (1%)
 (0.5%)
  (1%)


Total Core Tablet 
250
250
250
250


Weight (mg)






Total Batch size (kg)
5 and 6.3
5
5
5


Coating






Opadry film coating
n/a
7.5
10
n/a


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
n/a
257.5
260
n/a


Coating Batch size (kg)
n/a
1.975
2.0
n/a









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        BHT (if required)
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 10 minutes (Example 18.1, 6.3 kg batch size), 6 minutes (Example 18.2), or 5 minutes (Example 18.1, 5 kg batch size, Example 18.3 and 18.4) with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag.
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press. The compression parameters are presented in Tables 18.1 to 18.4.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into an 18 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 1.5 kg (Example 18.1 cured at 72° C.), 2.0 kg (Example 18.1 cured at 75° and 78° C.), 1.975 kg (Example 18.2 cured at 72° C. and 75° C.), 2.0 kg (Example 18.3), 2.0 kg (Example 18.4 cured at 72° C. and 75° C.).
    8. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed into the pan directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the moving bed of tablets.
    9. For Examples 18.1 to 18.4, the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve an target exhaust temperature of 72° C., 75° C. or 78° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target exhaust temperature. Once the target exhaust temperature was achieved, the inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were cured for durations of 15 minutes up to 90 minutes. After curing, the tablet bed was cooled. The temperature profiles for the curing processes for Examples 18.1 to 18.4 are presented in Tables 18.1.1 to 18.4.1.
    10. After cooling, the tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 53° C. (Examples 18.2 and 18.3, for Examples 18.1 and 18.4 film coating was not performed). The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 40° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% (Example 18.2) and 4% (Example 18.3) was achieved.
    11. After film coating was completed (Example 18.2), the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve the exhaust target temperature (72° C. for one batch and 75° C. for one batch). The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target exhaust temperature. Once the target exhaust temperature was achieved, the inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The film coated tablets were cured for an additional 30 minutes. After the additional curing, the tablet bed was cooled. The temperature profile for the curing process for Example 18.2 is presented in Table 18.2.1.
    12. The pan speed was reduced and the inlet temperature was set to 22° C. The system cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30° C.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests and stability tests was performed as follows:
Core tablets (uncured), cured tablets, and cured/coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (some testing included basket with a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points included 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, and 12.0 hours.
Uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Example 18.4 tablets (cured at 72° C. and 75° C. respectively) were subjected to a stability test by storing them in 6 count bottles at different storage conditions (25° C./60% relative humidity or 40° C./75% relative humidity or 50° C.) for a certain period of time and subsequently testing the tablets in vitro as described above. Sample time points regarding storage include initial sample (i.e. prior to storage), two weeks and one month, sample time points regarding dissolution test include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Tables 18.2.2 to 18.4.2.










TABLE 18.1.1









Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments










Curing process at 72° C. for Example 18.1













0
—
23 to 80
24.8
28.4
28.9
Pan load 1.5 kg; start heating


10
—
80
76.4
65.5
65.2


15
—
80
79.9
70.8
70.3


20
0
80 to 78
80.0
72.3
72.0
Start of curing


25
5
78 to 75
76.6
71.9
72.9


35
15
75
75
71.4
72.0
Sample


40
20
75
75.1
71.7
72.5


50
30
75
74.9
72.0
72.7
Sample


60
40
74
73.9
71.4
72.2


65
45
74
74
71.5
72.1
Sample


80
60
74
74
71.2
71.8
Sample


95
75
74
73.9
71.7
72.3
Sample


110
90
74 to 22
74
71.7
72.3
End of curing, take sample, add








0.3 g of magnesium stearate, start








cooling


129
—
22
23.1
27.4
26.9
End cooling, no sticking during








cool down, discharge







Curing process at 75° C. for Example 18.1













0
—
23 to 85
24.1
25.0
24.9
Pan load 2.0 kg, start heating


10
—
85
79.6
67.4
66.5


15
—
85
85
73.8
72.3


19
0
85 to 82
85.1
76.2
75
Start of curing


22
3
82 to 80
80.5
75.3
76.2


29
10
78
78
74.2
75.1


34
15
78
78.2
73.6
75.1
Sample


49
30
78
77.8
74.5
75.5
Sample


59
40
77.5
77.6
74.66
75.4


64
45
77.5
77.6
74.8
75.4
Sample


79
60
77.5
77.6
74.6
75.1
Sample


94
75
77.5
77.5
74.5
75.1
Sample, minor sticking


109
90
77.5
77.6
75.0
75.6
End of curing, take sample, start








cooling


116
—
22
30.6
42.6
46.7
Minor sticking at support arms


122
—
22
25
—
33.5
End cooling







Curing process at 78° C. for Example 18.1













0
—
82
35
37.6
35.9
Pan load 2 kg, start heating


7
—
85
84.9
71.3
69.8


14
—
85
84.9
75.9
75.0


17.5
0
85 to 83
85.1
77.4
78.0
Start of curing


22.5
5
83
83.2
77.5
78.6


32.5
15
82
81.9
76.9
78.4
Sample


47.5
30
81
80.9
77.4
78.3
Sample


57.5
40
80.5
80.6
77.5
78.1


62.5
45
80.5
80.7
77.4
78.2
Sample


69.5
52
80.5
80.4
77.5
78.2
Minor sticking


77.5
60
80.5
80.6
77.6
78.3
Sample, sticking


87.5
70
—
—
—
—
Add 0.3 g of magnesium stearate


92.5
75
80.0
79.8
77.1
78.1
Sample, sticking continued, brief








improvement of tablet flow with








magnesium stearate addition


107.5
90
80.0
79.9
77.5
78.0
Sample, start cooling





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 18.1.2









Example 18.1 (6.3 kg batch)




Uncured




core tablets




n = 12






Compression force (kN)
15


Tablet
Weight (mg)
250


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.08



Breaking strength (N)
87
















Example 18.1 cured at 72° C.













uncured
15 min cure
60 min cure




n = 3
n = 3
n = 2





Dissolution
 1 hr
25
26
25


(% Released)
 2 hr
40
40
40


SGF
 4 hr
66
64
62


No spring
 8 hr
95
89
91



12 hr
102
97
92














Example 18.1 (5.0 kg batch)




Uncured core tablets




n = 25






Compression force (kN) 
15


Tablet
Weight (mg)
253


Dimensions 
Thickness (mm)
4.13



Breaking strength (N)
92

















Example 18.1 






cured at 75° C.
Example 18.1















15 min
60 min
cured at 78° C.




uncured
cure
cure
30 min cure




n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3





Dissolution
 1 hr
26
26
26
26


(% Released)
 2 hr
40
41
42
41


SGF
 4 hr
63
67
68
66


No spring
 8 hr
90
94
94
93



12 hr
101
101
100
101



















TABLE 18.2.1









Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments










Curing process at 72° C. for Example 18.2













0
—
42 to 80
41.9
37.4
37.8
Pan load 1.975 kg, start heating


10
—
80
80.0
68.0
68.6


18
0
80
80.1
71.6
72.0
Start of curing


28
10
75
74.5
70.7
72.4


33
15
75 to 22
75.0
71.1
72.3
End of curing, start cooling


47.5
—
22
22.5
30.4
30.0
End cooling, sample, ready to








coat







Apply 3% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
50 to 80
50
48.0
43.0
Start heating for additional curing


12
0
80 to 77
80.0
72.1
72.0
Start additional curing


27
15
75
74.9
71.0
72.4
Sample 15 minute additional








curing


42
30
74 to 22
73.9
70.7
72.1
Sample, 30 minute additional








curing, start cooling


61
—
22
—
—
30
End cooling, discharge, sample







Curing process at 75° C. for Example 18.2













0
—
42 to 82
41.8
39.7
40.1
Pan load 1.975 kg, start heating


13
—
82
82
73.0
72.2


18
0
82 to 80
81.9
75.2
75.0
Start of curing


33
15
78 to 22
77.8
74.2
75.4
End of curing, start cooling, no








sticking


49
—
22
22.5
28.8
29.5
End cooling, sample, ready to








coat







Apply 3% filmcoat to the tablets, once achieved start heating













0
—
48 to 83
48.0
44.5
41.5
Start heating for additional curing


13
0
83
83.3
75.6
75.4
Start additional curing


28
15
78
78.0
74.6
75.4
Sample 15 minute additional








curing


44.5
31.5
77.5 to 22  
77.4
74.4
75.4
Sample 30 minute additional








curing, start cooling


58.5
—
22
24.2
—
30
End cooling, discharge, sample





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 18.2.2









Example 18.2




Uncured core tablets













n = 10
n = 10
n = 10






Tooling size, round (in)
3⁄8
3⁄8
 13/32



Compression force (kN)
8
15
15


Tablet
Weight (mg)
253
253
252


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.24
4.21
3.77



Breaking strength (N)
50
68
55














Example 18.2 cured at 72° C.




Compression force (kN)













8
15
15




15 min cure,
15 min cure,
15 min cure,




coated
coated
coated














n = 3
n = 6
n = 3
n = 6
n = 3










Dissolution Basket*
















No
With
No
With
No
With




spring
spring
spring
spring
spring
spring





Dissolution1
1 hr
22 (4.9)
23 (6.5)
22 (4.8)
24 (5.6)
23 (2.2)


(% Released)
2 hr
36 (6.1)
38 (5.4)
36 (6.7)
39 (4.4)
37 (3.9)


SGF
4 hr
58 (5.8)
63 (2.3)
58 (7.0)
63 (2.3)
59 (5.2)



6 hr
75 (4.9)
80 (1.2)
75 (4.9)
80 (1.6)
76 (4.2)



8 hr
87 (4.1)
90 (1.2)
88 (3.1)
90 (1.8)
88 (3.2)



12 hr 
96 (1.9)
99 (0.8)
97 (1.2)
98 (1.6)
97 (1.1)



16 hr 
—
100 (1.4) 
—
101 (2.8) 
—





*Some testing included the use of a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft;


1the values in parantheses indicate relative standard deviation.













TABLE 18.3.1







Curing process at 72° C. for Example 18.3










Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
22 to 80
25.1
29.4
30.1
Pan load 2.0 kg, start heating


10
—
80
80.2
68.3
68.0


19
0
80
80.0
71.8
72.0
Start of curing


24
5
76
75.7
71.2
72.5


29
10
76 to 75
76.0
71.3
72.7


34
15
75 to 22
74.9
70.7
72.2
End of curing, start cooling


49
—
22
22.9
29.1
29.7
End cooling





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 18.3.2









Example 18.3




Uncured core tablets














Tooling
Round 3⁄8 inch
Oval 0.600 × 0.270 inch



Compression force (kN)
15
10-11







n = 5
n = 5





Tablet
Weight (mg)
250
250


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.20
3.80-3.84



Breaking strength (N)
83-110
71-76














Example 18.3 cured at 72° C.












15 min cure, coated
15 min cure, coated




Round 3⁄8 inch
Oval 0.600 × 0.270 inch













n = 6
n = 6
n = 6






Dissolution Basket *
No spring
With spring
No spring


Dissolution1
 1 hr
23 (7.0)
23 (4.9)
24 (7.2)


(% Released)
 2 hr
37 (6.2)
38 (3.4)
40 (6.0)


SGF
 4 hr
59 (4.6)
61 (1.9)
64 (5.0)



 6 hr
75 (3.5)
79 (1.5)
81 (2.8)



 8 hr
87 (2.7)
89 (2.1)
91 (2.0)



12 hr
98 (2.6)
98 (16)
98 (1.6)





* Some testing included the use of a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft.


1the values in parantheses indicate relative standard deviation.
















TABLE 18.4.1









Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments










Curing process at 72° C. for Example 18.4













0
—
82
35.6
37.3
36.3
Pan load 2.0 kg; start heating


8
—
82
82
69.8
68.8


13.5
0
82
82
72.6
72.0
Start of curing


18.5
5
80 to 79
79.6
72.0
73.5


23.5
10
76
75.9
71.4
73.0


28.5
15
75
75
70.9
72.4
Sample


38.5
25
75
74.9
70.9
72.5


43.5
30
75
75
71.1
72.6
Sample


51.5
38
75
75.1
71.4
72.7


58.5
45
75
75
71.4
72.8
Sample


68.5
55
75
75.2
71.6
73.0


73.5
60
75
75
71.5
73
End of curing, sample, start








cooling


78.5
—
23
37.4
48
52.2
Continue cooling







Curing process at 75° C. for Example 18.4













0
—
85
26.1
31.0
29.1
Pan load 2.0 kg, start heating


5
—
82
73.8
61.9
61.1


11
—
82
79.9
69.3
68.3


17.5
0
85
85
76.2
75
Start of curing


27.5
10
78
77.8
74.4
76.1


32.5
15
78
77.9
74.5
75.9
Sample


39.5
22
77.55
77.4
74.1
75.6


47.5
30
77.5
77.4
74.2
75.6
Sample


55.5
38
77
76.9
74.0
75.4


62.5
45
77
77
73.9
75.3
Sample


69.5
52
77
77.2
73.8
75.3


77.5
60
77
77.0
73.7
75.3
End of curing, sample, start








cooling





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 18.4.2









Example 18.4















Uncured








core




tablets




n = 25






Compression force (kN)
15


Tablet
Weight (mg)
254


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.15



Breaking strength (N)
85













Example 18.4
Example 18.4



cured at 72° C.
cured at 75° C.
















15 min
60 min
15 min
60 min




uncured
cure
cure
cure
cure




n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3
n = 3





Dissolution
1 hr
26
26
26
26
25


(% Released)
2 hr
41
41
41
42
40


SGF
4 hr
63
64
65
65
64


No spring
8 hr
89
89
94
91
89



12 hr 
98
99
100
100
99













Example 18.4, 2 week stability




15 min cure at 72° C.















initial
25/601
40/751
50° C.





n = 3
n = 4
n = 4
n = 4





Dissolution
1 hr
26
26
26
27


(% Released)
2 hr
41
40
41
42


SGF
4 hr
64
62
63
65


No spring
6 hr
—
—
—
—



8 hr
89
88
90
92



12 hr 
99
99
99
102













Example 18.4, 2 week stability




15 min cure at 75° C.















initial
25/601
40/751
50° C.





n = 3
n = 4
n = 4
n = 4





Dissolution
1 hr
26
25
26
25


(% Released)
2 hr
42
39
41
40


SGF
4 hr
65
60
64
63


No spring
6 hr
—
—
—
—



8 hr
91
84
90
91



12 hr 
100
95
99
99













Example 18.4




1 month stability



15 min cure at 72° C.















initial
25/601
40/751
50° C.





n = 3
n = 4
n = 4
n = 3





Dissolution
1 hr
26
26
26
26


(% Released)
2 hr
41
41
40
41


SGF
4 hr
64
63
63
66


No spring
6 hr
—
79
79
83



8 hr
89
89
91
93



12 hr 
99
98
99
101





1storage conditions, i.e. 25° C./60% RH or 40° C./75% RH






Example 19
In Example 19, two different Oxycodone HCl tablet formulations containing 80 mg of Oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide at a tablet weight of 250 mg. One of the formulations (Example 19.1) contained Polyethylene oxide N60K and one formulation (Example 19.2) contained Polyethylene oxide N12K.
Compositions:













Example 19.1
Example 19.2



mg/unit
mg/unit

















Ingredient




Oxycodone HCl
80
80



  (32%)
  (32%)


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
168.75
0


2,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-N60K)
(67.5%)



Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
0
168.75


1,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-N12K)

(67.5%)


Magnesium Stearate
1.25
1.25



 (0.5%)
 (0.5%)


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
250
250


Total Batch size (kg)
2.0
2.0


Coating




Opadry film coating
10
10


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
260
260


Coating Batch size (kg)
1.4
1.4









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—8 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Remaining polyethylene oxide
        Note: the polyethylene oxide was screened through a 20-mesh screen, retain material was not used.
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag.
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press at 30,000 tph speed using 3⁄8 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling. The compression parameters are presented in Tables 19.1 and 19.2.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into an 18 inch Compu-Lab coating pan.
    8. A temperature probe (wire thermocouple) was placed into the pan directly above the tablet bed so that the probe tip was near the moving bed of tablets.
    9. The tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet temperature to achieve an exhaust target temperature of 72° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target temperature. Once the target exhaust temperature was achieved, the inlet temperature was adjusted as necessary to maintain the target exhaust temperature. The tablets were cured for 15 minutes. After curing, the inlet temperature was set to 22° C. and the tablet bed was cooled. The temperature profiles for the curing processes for Examples 19.1 and 19.2 are presented in Tables 19.1.1 and 19.2.1.
    10. After cooling, the tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 53° C. The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 41° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
    11. After film coating was completed, the tablet bed was cooled by setting the inlet temperature to 22° C. The tablet bed was cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30° C. or less was achieved.
    12. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests was performed as follows:
Core tablets (uncured), cured tablets, and cured/coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket with a retaining spring placed at the top of the basket to reduce the propensity of the tablet to stick to the base of the shaft) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points included 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0, 12.0 and 16.0 hours.
Uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
Tablet dimensions and dissolution results are presented in Tables 19.1.2 and 19.2.2.







TABLE 19.1.1







Example 19.1 (PEO N60K)










Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
22 to 80
25.3
26.4 
26.9
Pan load 1.4 kg; start heating


21
0
80
79.9
70.0 *
72.0
Start of curing


31
10
75.5
75.5
69.1 *
72.2
Good tablet flow, no sticking


36
15
75.5 to 22  
75.4
69.5 *
72.4
End of curing, start cooling


50
—
22
22.6
27.5 
30.0
End of cooling, sample





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust;


* Low temperature values compared to the exhaust temperature. Changed the battery prior to processing Example 19.2.















TABLE 19.1.2









Example 19.1 (PEO N60K)




Uncured core tablets




n = 15






Compression 
15



force (kN)



Tablet
Weight (mg)
252


Dimensions
Thickness (min)
4.12



Breaking 
112



strength (N)
















Example 19.1 cured at 72° C.













uncured
15 min cure
Cured/coated




n = 3
n = 3
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
25 (2.3)
25 (2.1)
25 (3.7)


(% Released)
 2 hr
40 (1.8)
40 (1.3)
40 (3.8)


SGF
 4 hr
67 (0.7)
66 (1.5)
65 (1.4)


Basket with
 6 hr
85 (1.0)
86 (3.9)
84 (1.0)


spring
 8 hr
97 (0.8)
98 (1.8)
95 (0.7)



12 hr
101 (1.2) 
103 (1.2) 
102 (0.8) 



16 hr
102 (0.7) 
103 (2.0) 
103 (1.1) 
















TABLE 19.2.1







Example 19.2 (PEO N12K)










Temperature














Total
Curing
Set
Actual





Time
time
inlet
inlet
Probe
Exhaust


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)
(° C.)2
(° C.)3
(° C.)4
Comments
















0
—
22 to 80
27.0
31.4
30.9
Pan load 1.4 kg; start heating


19.5
0
80
80.1
71.5
72.0
Start of curing


24.5
5
77
76.7
71.0
72.8


29.5
10
75
75.0
70.3
72.0
Good tablet flow, no sticking


34.5
15
75 to 22
75.1
70.4
72.0
End of curing, start cooling


49
—
22
22.4
30.0
30.0
End of cooling, sample





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured using the temperature probe (wire thermocouple)


4temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 19.2.2









Example 19.1 (PEO N12K)




Uncured core tablets




n = 15






Compression 
15



force (kN)



Tablet
Weight (mg)
257


Dimensions
Thickness (mm)
4.17



Breaking 
107



strength (N)
















Example 19.2 cured at 72° C.













uncured
15 min cure 
Cured/coated




n = 3
n = 3
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
277 (7.6)
 25 (1.0)
 26 (4.0)


(% Released)
 2 hr
 44 (4.9)
 42 (0.6)
 43 (3.7)


SGF
 4 hr
 72 (2.5)
 70 (0.6)
 71 (1.8)


Basket with
 6 hr
 92 (1.1)
 92 (0.6)
 91 (1.2)


spring
 8 hr
102 (0.9)
101 (1.1)
100 (1.4)



12 hr
102 (1.1)
101 (0.9)
101 (1.3)



16 hr
103 (0.3)
103 (1.3)
102 (1.1)









Example 20
Indentation Test
In Example 20, tablets corresponding to Examples 13.1 to 13.5, 14.1 to 14.5, 16.1, 16.2, 17.1 and 18.2 were subjected to an indentation test with a Texture Analyzer to quantify the tablet strength.
The indentation tests were performed with a TA-XT2 Texture Analyzer (Texture Technologies Corp., 18 Fairview Road, Scarsdale, N.Y. 10583) equipped with a TA-8A 1⁄8 inch diameter stainless steel ball probe. The probe height was calibrated to 6 mm above a stainless stand with slightly concaved surface. The tablets were placed on top of the stainless stand and aligned directly under the probe. Each type of tablets was tested at least once. Single measurement values are reported. Testing performed on the same type of tablet produced similar results unless the tablet and the probe were misaligned. In such an event, the data would be rejected upon confirmation by visual examination of the tested tablet.
The indentation tests were run with the following parameters:
















pre-test speed
0.5 mm/s,



test speed
0.5 mm/s,



automatic trigger force
10 grams,



post-test speed
1.0 mm/s,



test distance
3.0 mm.










The results are presented in Tables 20.1 to 20.3 and in FIGS. 20 to 33.







TABLE 20.1







Cracking force, “penetration depth to crack” distance and work values









Indentation Test Results












Cracking
Maximum
Distance
Work



Force (N)
Force (N) 6
(mm) 7
(J) 8














Example 13.11
—
189
3.00
0.284


Example 13.21
—
188
3.00
0.282


Example 13.31
191
—
2.91
0.278


Example 13.41
132
—
1.81
0.119


Example 13.51
167
—
1.82
0.152


Example 17.12
 >2505  
—
>2.0
>0.250


Example 18.22
194
—
1.80
0.175


Example 14.13
213
—
2.52
0.268


Example 14.23
196
—
2.27
0.222


Example 14.33
161
—
1.90
0.153


Example 14.43
137
—
1.51
0.103


Example 14.53
134
—
1.39
0.093


Example 16.14
227
—
2.23
0.253


Example 16.24
224
—
2.17
0.243





1indentation test performed with tablets cured for 30 min and uncoated (curing time determined according to method 4, curing started when the probe temperature reached 70° C., see Example 13).


2indentation test performed with tablets cured at 72° C. for 15 minutes and coated (curing time determined according to method 2, curing started when the exhaust air temperature reached 72° C., see Examples 17 and 18),


3indentation test performed with tablets cured for 1 hour and coated (curing time determined according to method 1, curing started when the inlet air temperature reached 75° C., see Example 14),


4indentation test performed with tablets cured for 15 minutes and coated (curing time determined according to method 2, curing started when the exhaust air temperature reached 72° C., see Example 16),


5The peak force exceeded the detection limit,


6 In the indentation tests where the tablets did not crack under the test conditions given above, the maximum force at penetration depth of 3.0 mm is given instead of a cracking force;


7 “penetration depth to crack” distance


8 approximated value, calculated using the equation: Work ≈ 1⁄2 · Force [N] × Distance [m].













TABLE 20.2







Selective force values at incremental distance change of 0.1 mm








Dis-
Force (N)














tance
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.


(mm)
13.1
13.2
13.3
13.4
13.5
17.1
18.2

















0.0
0.18
0.18
0.15
0.17
0.24
0.14
0.35


0.1
3.54
4.86
3.67
4.38
5.35
6.12
6.88


0.2
8.76
10.56
9.95
10.29
12.37
15.13
15.51


0.3
15.49
16.97
16.85
17.62
22.22
25.57
25.33


0.4
22.85
24.19
23.81
25.44
32.98
35.86
35.21


0.5
30.43
31.59
30.81
33.42
43.85
46.10
45.25


0.6
37.80
38.82
38.42
41.49
55.41
56.87
55.60


0.7
45.61
46.10
46.61
49.73
67.02
67.69
66.85


0.8
53.30
53.08
54.53
58.37
78.43
78.71
78.24


0.9
60.67
60.25
62.38
67.00
89.60
90.74
89.60


1.0
68.02
67.55
70.89
75.45
100.38
103.18
101.69


1.1
75.29
74.67
80.12
83.75
110.46
116.10
114.50


1.2
82.81
81.40
89.03
91.14
119.87
129.90
127.13


1.3
90.04
88.23
97.49
98.35
129.16
144.28
139.46


1.4
96.85
95.21
105.89
105.88
138.29
158.94
151.41


1.5
103.92
101.84
114.37
112.94
146.76
173.41
162.88


1.6
111.30
108.30
122.31
119.59
154.61
188.13
173.95


1.7
118.27
115.16
129.99
125.85
161.87
202.39
184.52


1.8
125.02
121.81
136.94
131.63
167.65
216.08
193.31


1.9
131.71
128.37
143.45
137.30
165.05
229.06
190.80


2.0
138.09
134.64
149.56
142.86
163.03
241.23
191.16


2.1
144.38
140.46
155.52
148.05
165.82
250.171
192.11


2.2
150.54
146.46
160.93
153.34
168.86
—
191.84


2.3
156.18
152.31
166.39
158.55
171.13
—
189.31


2.4
161.57
157.73
171.41
163.52
172.21
—
185.17


2.5
166.80
163.24
176.29
168.34
171.66
—
179.55


2.6
171.67
168.53
180.67
172.34
169.90
—
173.09


2.7
176.24
173.45
184.52
175.57
167.51
—
166.68


2.8
180.39
178.37
187.79
177.84
164.67
—
158.70


2.9
184.61
183.24
190.54
180.35
161.12
—
148.39


3.0
188.65
187.97
192.92
182.88
156.21
—
137.65





1Force value at a distance of 2.0825 mm













TABLE 20.3







Selective force values at incremental distance change of 0.1 mm








Dis-
Force (N)














tance
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.


(mm)
14.1
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5
16.1
16.2

















0.0
0.33
0.27
0.33
0.31
0.41
0.27
0.26


0.1
6.06
6.03
6.55
6.61
5.78
6.22
7.25


0.2
13.81
13.05
13.65
15.53
13.51
13.88
15.52


0.3
22.48
21.42
21.55
24.82
21.87
23.31
25.11


0.4
31.41
29.68
29.51
34.09
31.12
33.72
35.29


0.5
40.00
37.79
37.99
43.44
41.26
43.82
45.31


0.6
48.85
46.69
47.69
52.78
52.22
54.19
55.47


0.7
57.85
55.26
57.19
62.09
63.53
64.60
66.58


0.8
66.76
64.45
66.87
71.64
74.72
75.69
78.37


0.9
75.69
73.68
76.43
81.47
85.73
87.70
90.38


1.0
84.63
83.33
86.31
91.14
96.72
99.88
103.07


1.1
94.04
92.81
95.86
100.28
107.27
112.14
116.67


1.2
103.45
101.93
105.14
109.77
118.11
124.54
130.10


1.3
112.69
111.76
115.04
119.97
128.22
137.12
143.13


1.4
122.63
122.04
125.05
129.55
133.77
149.34
155.78


1.5
132.50
132.04
134.14
137.20
134.95
161.51
168.25


1.6
141.98
141.82
142.58
135.04
139.81
173.01
180.44


1.7
151.21
150.82
150.69
139.12
144.84
184.28
192.28


1.8
160.27
159.44
157.82
143.60
148.83
194.58
203.45


1.9
169.02
168.09
161.72
146.81
151.39
204.27
212.71


2.0
177.84
176.40
162.87
148.59
152.52
213.25
218.71


2.1
186.18
184.67
165.88
149.32
152.56
221.06
223.17


2.2
194.39
192.38
169.78
149.19
151.29
226.97
224.84


2.3
202.16
196.66
173.59
148.16
147.83
219.64
226.60


2.4
208.46
199.43
176.38
146.05
141.54
210.57
228.33


2.5
212.94
202.98
178.44
142.81
134.06
203.85
228.97


2.6
213.83
206.77
179.87
137.70
124.24
197.33
228.49


2.7
216.58
209.46
181.13
131.34
109.53
189.49
227.40


2.8
219.71
211.32
182.02
123.72
88.60
181.26
225.10


2.9
222.51
211.01
181.70
114.09
20.86
174.45
222.87


3.0
224.59
208.85
179.91
102.93
0.16
168.70
220.36









Example 21
Indentation Test
In Example 21, tablets corresponding to Examples 16.1 (60 mg Oxycodone HCl) and 16.2 (80 mg oxycodone HCL) and commercial OxycontinTM 60 mg and OxycontinTM 80 mg tablets were subjected to an indentation test with a Texture Analyzer to quantify the tablet strength.
The indentation tests were performed as described in Example 20.
The results are presented in Table 21 and in FIGS. 34 and 35.







TABLE 21







Selective force values at incremental distance change of 0.1 mm








Distance
Force (N)











(mm)
Ex. 16.1 
Oxycontin TM 60 mg
Ex. 16.2
Oxycontin TM 80 mg














0.0
0.27
0.42
0.26
0.42


0.1
6.22
14.14
7.25
14.21


0.2
13.88
30.39
15.52
29.75


0.3
23.31
46.53
25.11
44.30


0.4
33.72
61.94
35.29
59.46


0.5
43.82
78.14
45.31
75.33


0.6
54.19
13.58
55.47
91.91


0.7
64.60
0.30
66.58
108.71


0.8
75.69
0.09
78.37
1.48


0.9
87.70
0.00
90.38
1.52


1.0
99.88
0.01
103.07
1.17


1.1
112.14
0.01
116.67
1.31


1.2
124.54
0.00
130.10
3.61


1.3
137.12
0.01
143.13
7.85


1.4
149.34
0.00
155.78
3.49


1.5
161.51
0.00
168.25
0.15


1.6
173.01
0.00
180.44
0.85


1.7
184.28
0.00
192.28
1.46


1.8
194.58
0.00
203.45
1.12


1.9
204.27
0.00
212.71
0.81


2.0
213.25
0.02
218.71
0.52


2.1
221.06
−0.01
223.17
0.14


2.2
226.97
−0.01
224.84
0.13


2.3
219.64
−0.01
226.60
0.10


2.4
210.57
0.01 
228.33
0.09


2.5
203.85
0.00 
228.97
0.08


2.6
197.33
0.00 
228.49
0.08


2.7
189.49
−0.01
227.40
0.07


2.8
181.26
0.00 
225.10
0.08


2.9
174.45
0.00 
222.87
0.07


3.0
168.70
0.00 
220.36
0.08









Comparative Example 22
In Comparative Example 22, five different 150 mg tablets (Examples 22.1 to 22.5) including 10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg of oxycodone HCl were prepared using the compositions as described in Example 13, and amending the manufacturing process of Example 13 insofar that the tablets were subjected to a molding step instead of a curing step.
Compositions:
















Example
Example
Example
Example 
Example



22.1
22.2
22.3
22.4
22.5


Ingredient
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit
mg/unit




















Oxycodone HCl
10
15
20
30
40


Polyethylene oxide
138.5
133.5
128.5
118.5
108.5


(MW: approximately







4,000,000;







Polyox TM WSR-301)







Magnesium Stearate
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5
1.5


Total Core Tablet
150
150
150
150
150


Weight (mg)







Total Batch size
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg
10 kg









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A Patterson Kelly “V’ blender (with I bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the I bar on.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged into the “V” blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the I bar off.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag.
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station tablet press at 35,000 tph speed using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling.
    7. Step 6 tablets were molded with a temperature controlled Specac press. The compressed tablets from step 6 were placed between two heated plates which were preheated to 120° C. and then compressed at a pressured setting of 1000 kg and held for 3 minutes. The molten tablets were cooled to room temperature prior to density measurement.


The density measurement was performed as follows:
The density of tablets before and after the molding step was determined by Archimedes principle, using a Top-loading Mettler Toledo balance Model #AB 135-S/FACT, Serial #1127430072 and a density determination kit 33360, according to the following procedure:

    1. Set-up the Mettler Toledo balance with the Density Determination Kit.
    2. Fill an appropriately sized beaker (200 ml) with hexane.
    3. Weigh the tablet in air and record the weight as Weight A.
    4. Transfer the same tablet onto the lower coil within the beaker filled with hexane.
    5. Determine the weight of the tablet in hexane and record the weight as Weight B.
    6. Perform the density calculation according to the equation






  
    ρ
    =
    
      
        A
        
          A
          -
          B
        
      
      ·
      
        ρ
        0
      
    
  
  ,




    
    
         wherein
        
            ρ: Density of the tablet
            A: Weight of the tablet in air
            B: Weight of the tablet when immersed in the liquid
            ρ0: Density of the liquid at a given temperature (density of hexane at 20° C.=0.660 g/ml (Merck Index)
        
        
    
    
    7. Record the density.

The reported density values are mean values of 3 tablets and all refer to uncoated tablets.



The results are presented in Table 22.1.









TABLE 22.1








Density (g/cm3)1
Density change after











Unmolded tablet2 
Molded tablet
molding (%)3













Example 22.1
1.172
1.213
+3.498


Example 22.2
1.174
1.213
+3.322


Example 22.3
1.179
1.222
+3.647


Example 22.4
1.182
1.231
+4.146


Example 22.5
1.222
1.237
+1.227





1The density value is a mean value of 3 tablets measured;


2The density of the “unmolded tablet” corresponds to the density of the “uncured tablet” of Examples 13.1 to 13.5;


3The density change after molding corresponds to the observed density change in % of the molded tablets in comparison to the unmolded tablets.






Example 23
In Example 23, 154.5 mg tablets including 30 mg Hydromorphone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide.
Composition:













mg/unit
g/batch







Ingredient




Hydromorphone HCl
30
1000


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
119.25
3975


4,000,000; Polyox TM WSR-301)




Magnesium Stearate
0.75
25


Total Cote Tablet Weight (mg)
150



Total Batch size
10 kg (2 × 5 kg)



Coating




Opacity film coating
4.5



Total Tablet Weight (mg)
154.5



Coating Batch Size (kg)
3.835 kg










The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A PK V-blender (with I-bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately half of the Polyethylene Oxide 301
        Hydromorphone HCl
        Remaining Polyethylene Oxide 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the intensifier bar ON.
    3. Magnesium stearate was charged in the PK V-blender.
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 1 minute with the intensifier bar OFF.
    5. Step 4 blend was charged into a plastic bag (Note: two 5 kg blends were produced to provide 10 kgs available for compression).
    6. Step 5 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station rotary tablet press using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling at 35,000 to 40,800 tph speed using 5-8 kN compression force.
    7. Step 6 tablets were loaded into a 24 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 9.068 kg.
    8. The pan speed was set to 10 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet air temperature to achieve an exhaust temperature of approximately 72° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved 72° C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 1 hour. Tablet samples were taken after 30 minutes of curing.
    9. After 1 hour of curing at the target exhaust temperature of 72° C., the inlet temperature was set to 90° C. to increase the exhaust temperature (the bed temperature).
    10. After 10 minutes of increased heating, the exhaust temperature reached 82° C. The tablet continued to maintain good flow/bed movement. No sticking was observed.
    11. The inlet temperature was set to 22° C. to initiate cooling. During the cool down period (to an exhaust temperature of 42° C.), no sticking or agglomerating of tablets was observed.
    12. Step 11 tablets were loaded into a 24 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 8.835 kg.
    13. The tablet bed was warmed by setting the inlet air temperature at 55° C. The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature approached 42° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 3% was achieved.
    14. Film coating was conducted at a spray rate of 40-45 g/min. airflow target at 350 cfm, and pan speed initiated at 10 rpm and increased to 15 rpm. After coating was completed the pan speed was set to 3.5 rpm and the tablets were allowed to cool.
    15. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including dissolution, assay and content uniformity test was performed as follows:
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 220 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were subjected to the assay test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two sets of ten tablets each with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were subjected to the content uniformity test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from ten separate tablets each with 90 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 100-mL volumetric flask until the tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC15 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° (using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The results are presented in Table 23.










TABLE 23








Example 23




30 min cure



















Assay
98.9



(% oxycodone HCl)1




Content uniformity
97.9



(% oxycodone HCl)1












Dissolution
 1 hr
26



(% Released)
 2 hr
42



(n-6)
 4 hr
66




 8 hr
92




12 hr
101







1relative to the label claim of Oxycodone HCl






Example 24
In Example 24, 150 mg tablets including 2 mg Hydromorphone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide.
Composition:












Ingredient
mg/unit
g/batch

















Hydromorphone HCl
2
66.5


Polyethylene oxide (MW: approximately
147.25
4908.5


4,000,000: Polyox TM WSR-301)




Magnesium Stearate
0.75
25


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
150



Total Batch size
10 kg (2 × 5 kg)










The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. A PK V-blender (with I-bar)—4 quart was charged in the following order:
    
        Approximately 600 g of the Polyethylene Oxide 301
        Hydromorphone HCl
        Approximately 600 g of the Polyethylene Oxide 301
    
    
    2. Step 1 materials were blended for 2 minutes with the I-bar ON and then discharged.
    3. A PK V-blender (with I-bar)—16 quart was charged in the following order
    
        Approximately half of the remaining Polyethylene Oxide 301
        Pre-blend material (from step 2)
        Remaining Polyethylene Oxide 301
    
    
    4. Step 3 materials were blended for 5 minutes with the intensifier bar ON.
    5. Magnesium stearate was charged in the PK V-blender.
    6. Step 5 materials were blended for 1 minute with the intensifier bar OFF.
    7. Step 6 blend was charged into a plastic bag (Note: two 5 kg blends were produced to provide 10 kgs available for compression).
    8. Step 7 blend was compressed to target weight on an 8 station rotary tablet press using 9/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling at 40,800 tph speed using 2 kN compression force.
    9. Step 8 tablets were loaded into a 24 inch Compu-Lab coating pan at a pan load of 9.146 kg.
    10. The pan speed was set to 10 rpm and the tablet bed was heated by setting the inlet air temperature to achieve an exhaust temperature of approximately 72° C. The curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature achieved 72° C. The tablets were cured at the target exhaust temperature for 1 hour. Tablet samples were taken after 30 minutes of curing.
    11. The pan speed was increased to 15 rpm once the exhaust temperature reached 72° C.
    12. After 1 hour of curing at the target exhaust temperature, the inlet temperature was set to 22° C. to initiate cooling. After 3 minutes of cooling the tablet bed massed forming large agglomerates of tablets. Coating was not feasible.
    13. The tablets were discharged.


It is assumed that the agglomeration of tablets can be avoided, for example by increasing the pan speed, by the use of Magnesium Stearate as anti-tacking agent, or by applying a sub-coating prior to curing.
In vitro testing including dissolution, assay and content uniformity test was performed as follows:
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37.0° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer (pH 3.0) at 220 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were subjected to the assay test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from two sets of ten tablets each with 900 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 1000-mL volumetric flask until all tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
Tablets cured for 30 minutes (uncoated) were subjected to the content uniformity test. Oxycodone hydrochloride was extracted from ten separate tablets each with 90 mL of a 1:2 mixture of acetonitrile and simulated gastric fluid without enzyme (SGF) under constant magnetic stirring in a 100-mL volumetric flask until the tablets were completely dispersed or for overnight. The sample solutions were diluted and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×250 mm, 5 μm column maintained at 60° C. using a mobile phase consisting of acetonitrile and potassium phosphate monobasic buffer at pH 3.0 with UV detection at 280 nm.
The results are presented in Table 24.











TABLE 24









Example 24





30 min cure



















Assay
95.7



(% oxycodone HCl)1




Content uniformity (% 
94.9



oxycodone HCl)1












Dissolution
 1 hr
26



(% Released)
 2 hr
39



(n = 6)
 4 hr
62




 8 hr
89




12 hr
98







1relative to the label claim of Oxycodone HCl






Example 25
In Example 25, two different 400 mg tablets including 60 mg (Example 25.1 and 25.2) and 80 mg (Example 25.3 and 25.4) of oxycodone HCl were prepared using high molecular weight polyethylene oxide and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide. Two 100 kg batches were prepared for each formulation.












Example 25









Ingredient
mg/unit
mg/unit












Oxycodone HCl
60
80


Polyethylene oxide (MW:
229.7
216


approximately 4,000,000;




Polyox TM WSR-301)




Polyethylene oxide (MW:
106.3
100


approximately 100,000;




Polyox TM WSR-N10)




Magnesium Stearate
4
4


Total Core Tablet Weight (mg)
400
400














Example
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4





Total Batch size
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg
100 kg












Coating
mg/unit
mg/unit





Opadry film coating
16
16


Total Tablet Weight (mg)
416
416














Example
25.1
25.2
25.3
25.4





Coating Batch Size (kg)
91.440
96.307
95.568
98.924









The processing steps to manufacture tablets were as follows:

    1. The magnesium stearate was passed through a Sweco Sifter equipped with a 20 mesh screen, into a separate suitable container.
    2. A Gemco “V” blender (with I bar)—10 cu. ft. was charged in the following order.
    
        Approximately 1⁄2 of the polyethylene oxide WSR 301
        Oxycodone hydrochloride
        Polyethylene oxide WSR N10
        Remaining polyethylene oxide WSR 301
    
    
    3. Step 2 materials were blended for 10 minutes with the I bar on.
    4. Magnesium stearate was charged into the Gemco “V” blender.
    5. Step 4 materials were blended for 2 minutes with the I bar off.
    6. Step 5 blend was charged into a clean, tared, stainless steel container.
    7. Step 6 blend was compressed to target weight on a 40 station tablet press at 124,000 tph using 13/32 inch standard round, concave (embossed) tooling.
    8. Step 7 tablets were loaded into a 48 inch Accela-Coat coating pan at a load of 91.440 kg (Example 25.1), 96.307 kg (Example 25.2), 95.568 kg (Example 25.3) and 98.924 kg (Example 25.4).
    9. The pan speed was set at 6 to 10 rpm and the tablet bed was warmed using an exhaust air temperature to target a 55° C. inlet temperature. Film coating was started once the exhaust temperature approached 40° C. and continued for 10, 15 or 16 minutes. This initial film coat was performed to provide an “overcoat” for the tablets to function as an anti-tacking agent during the curing process.
    10. After completion of the “overcoat”, the tablet bed was heated by setting the exhaust air temperature to achieve a target inlet air temperature of 75° C. (Example 25.1 and 25.3) or to achieve a target exhaust temperature of 78° C. (Example 25.2 and 25.4). The tablets were cured at the target temperature for 65 minutes (Example 25.1), 52 minutes (Example 25.2), 80 minutes (Example 25.3) and 55 minutes (Example 25.4). For Example 25.1 and 25.3, the curing starting point (as described by method 1) was initiated once the inlet temperature reached the target inlet temperature. For Example 25.2 and 25.4, the curing starting point (as described by method 2) was initiated once the exhaust temperature reached the target exhaust temperature. The temperature profile of the curing processes of Examples 25.1 to 25.4 is presented in Tables 25.1.1 to 25.4.1.
    11. During the curing process, the pan speed was increased from 7 to 9 rpm (Example 25.1 and 25.3) and from 10 to 12 rpm (Example 25.2 and 25.4). For examples 25.1 to 25.4, 20 g of magnesium stearate was added as an anti-tacking agent. The tablet bed was cooled by setting the exhaust temperature setting to 30° C.
    12. After cooling, the tablet bed was warmed using an inlet setting of 53° C. The film coating was started once the exhaust temperature achieved approximately 39° C. and continued until the target weight gain of 4% was achieved.
    13. After film coating was completed, the tablet bed was cooled by setting the exhaust temperature to 27° C. The tablet bed was cooled to an exhaust temperature of 30° C. or less was achieved.
    14. The tablets were discharged.


In vitro testing including breaking strength tests was performed as follows.
Cured and coated tablets were tested in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC) on Waters Atlantis dC18 3.0×150 mm, 3 μm column, using a mobile phase consisting of a mixture of acetonitrile and non basic potassium phosphate buffer (pH 3.0) at 230 nm UV detection. Sample time points include 1.0, 2.0, 4.0, 6.0, 8.0 and 12.0 hours.
Uncured tablets were subjected to a breaking strength test by applying a force of a maximum of 196 Newton using a Schleuniger 2E/106 apparatus to evaluate tablet resistance to breaking.
The results are presented in Tables 25.1.2 to 25.4.2







TABLE 25.1.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 25.1
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
52
60
41
7



5
0
75
60
59
7
Start curing


15
10
81
65
66
7


25
20
85
68
70
7


35
30
73
71
70
9


45
40
75
72
72
9


55
50
75
72
72
9


65
60
74
72
72
9


70
65
75
72
72
9
End curing,








add 20 g Mg St


71
—
74
30
72
9
Start cooling


81
—
32
30
52
9


91
—
24
30
36
9


94
—
23
30
30
9
End cooling





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 25.1.2









Example 25.1












Uncured
cured, coated





Tablet
Weight (mg)
401
—


Dimensions

(n = 120)




Breaking
112
—



strength (N)
(n = 50) 
















TABLE 25.2.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 25.2
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
69
65
46
10



3
—
75
65
53
10


13
—
85
70
65
10


23
—
90
75
69
10


33
0
90
77
77
10
Start curing


43
10
78
77
75
10


53
20
79
77
77
10


63
30
81
77
77
10


73
40
80
77
77
12


83
50
79
77
77
12


85
52
80
77
77
12
End curing,








add 20 g Mg St


86
—
80
30
77
12
Start cooling


96
—
37
30
54
12


106
—
29
25
47
12


116
—
24
25
30
12
End cooling





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 25.2.2









Example 25.2














cured, coated
cured, coated 




Uncured
Initial data
2nd test data





Tablet
Weight (mg)
400
—
—


Dimensions

(n = 120)





Breaking
103
—
—



strength (N)
(n = 40) 








n = 6
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
23
24


(% 
 2 hr
—
39
43


Released)
 4 hr
—
62
70


SGF
 6 hr
—
79
88



 8 hr
—
90
99



12 hr
—
97
103
















TABLE 25.3.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 25.3
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
55
65
39
7



5
0
75
65
58
7
Start curing


15
10
82
66
66
7


25
20
86
68
70
7


35
30
76
72
72
7


45
40
75
72
72
7


55
50
75
72
72
7


65
60
75
72
72
9


75
70
74
72
72
9


85
80
74
72
72
9
End curing,








add 20 g Mg St


86
—
75
30
72
9
Start cooling


96
—
33
30
53
9


106
—
26
30
39
9


112
—
23
30
30
9
End cooling





1determined according to method 1,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 25.3.2









Example 25.3














cured, coated
cured, coated




Uncured
Initial data
2nd test data














Tablet
Weight (mg)
400
—
—


Dimensions

(n = 120)





Thickness (mm)
—
—
—



Diameter (mm)
—
—
—



Breaking
111
—
—



strength (N)
(n = 40) 
















TABLE 25.4.1







Temperature profile of the curing process for Ex. 25.4
















Set
Actual




Total
Curing
Inlet
exhaust
exhaust
Pan


time
time
temp.
temp.
temp.
speed


(min.)
(min.)1
(° C.)2
(° C.)
(° C.)3
(rpm)
Comments
















0
—
60
70
43
10



10
—
80
75
64
10


20
—
85
75
69
10


30
—
88
76
74
10


33
0
88
78
78
10
Start curing


43
10
75
78
76
12


53
20
84
78
79
12


63
30
82
78
78
12


73
40
79
78
78
12


83
50
82
78
78
12


88
55
80
78
78
12
End curing,








add 20 g Mg St


89
—
79
30
78
12
Start cooling


99
—
38
25
54
12


109
—
26
25
45
12


113
—
23
25
34
12
End cooling





1determined according to method 2,


2temperature measured at the inlet,


3temperature measured at the exhaust.















TABLE 25.4.2









Example 25.4














cured, coated 
cured, coated




Uncured
Initial data
2nd test data





Tablet
Weight (mg)
400
—
—


Dimensions

(n = 120)





Thickness (mm)
—
—
—



Diameter (mm)
—
—
—



Breaking
101
—
—



strength (N)
(n = 40) 








n = 6
n = 6





Dissolution
 1 hr
—
25
29


(%
 2 hr
—
42
47


Released)
 4 hr
—
66
73


SGF
 6 hr
—
84
91



 8 hr
—
96
99



12 hr
—
100
101


















TABLE 25.5








Density (g/cm3)1














30 min
60 min
Density change



Uncured
cure
cure
after curing (%)2





Example 25.1
1.205
1.153
1.138
−5.560


Example 25.3
1.207
1.158
1.156
−4.225





1The density was measured as described for Example 13. The density value is a mean value of 3 tablets measured;


2The density change after curing corresponds to the observed density change in % of the tablets cured for 60 min in comparison to the uncured tablets.






Example 26
In Example 26, a randomized, open-label, single-dose, four-treatment, four-period, four-way crossover study in healthy human subjects was conducted to assess the pharmacokinetic characteristics and relative bioavailability of three oxycodone tamper resistant formulations (10 mg oxycodone HCl tablets of Examples 7.1 to 7.3 relative to the commercial OxyContin® formulation (10 mg), in the fasted and fed state.
The study treatments were as follows:
Test Treatments:


    
    
        Treatment 1A: 1× Oxycodone HCl 10 mg Tablet of Example 7.3 (Formulation 1A) administered in the fasted or fed state.
        Treatment 1B: 1× Oxycodone HCl 10 mg Tablet of Example 7.2 (Formulation 1B) administered in the fasted or fed state.
        Treatment 1C: 1× Oxycodone HCl 10 mg Tablet of Example 7.1 (Formulation 1C) administered in the fasted or fed state.

Reference Treatment:

        Treatment OC: 1× OxyContin® 10 mg tablet administered in the fasted or fed state.
    
    


The treatments were each administered orally with 8 oz. (240 mL) water as a single dose in the fasted or fed state.
As this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Subject Selection
Screening Procedures
The following screening procedures were performed for all potential subjects at a screening visit conducted within 28 days prior to first dose administration:

    
    
        Informed consent.
        Weight, height, body mass index (BMI), and demographic data.
        Evaluation of inclusion/exclusion criteria.
        Medical and medication history, including concomitant medication.
        Vital signs—blood pressure, respiratory rate, oral temperature, and pulse rate (after being seated for approximately 5 minutes) and blood pressure and pulse rate after standing for approximately 2 minutes—and pulse oximetry (SPO2), including “How do you feel?” Inquiry.
        Routine physical examination (may alternately be performed at Check-in of Period 1).
        Clinical laboratory evaluations (including biochemistry, hematology, and urinalysis [UA]).
        12-lead electrocardiogram (ECG).
        Screens for hepatitis (including hepatitis B surface antigen [HBsAg], hepatitis B surface antibody [HBsAb], hepatitis C antibody [anti-HCV]), and selected drugs of abuse.
        Serum pregnancy test (female subjects only).
        Serum follicle stimulating hormone (FSH) test (postmenopausal females only)

Inclusion Criteria

    
    


Subjects who met the following criteria were included in the study.

    
    
        Males and females aged 18 to 50, inclusive.
        Body weight ranging from 50 to 100 kg (110 to 220 lbs) and a BMI≦18 and ≦34 (kg/m2).
        Healthy and free of significant abnormal findings as determined by medical history, physical examination, vital signs, and ECG.
        Females of child-bearing potential must be using an adequate and reliable method of contraception (e.g., barrier with additional spermicide foam or jelly, intra-uterine device, hormonal contraception (hormonal contraceptives alone are not acceptable). Females who are postmenopausal must have been postmenopausal ≧1 year and have elevated serum FSH.
        Willing to eat all the food supplied during the study.

Exclusion Criteria

    
    


The following criteria excluded potential subjects from the study.

    
    
        Females who are pregnant (positive beta human chorionic gonadotropin test) or lactating.
        Any history of or current drug or alcohol abuse for 5 years.
        History of or any current conditions that might interfere with drug absorption, distribution, metabolism or excretion.
        Use of an opioid-containing medication in the past 30 days.
        History of known sensitivity to oxycodone, naltrexone, or related compounds.
        Any history of frequent nausea or emesis regardless of etiology.
        Any history of seizures or head trauma with current sequelae.
        Participation in a clinical drug study during the 30 days preceding the initial dose in this study.
        Any significant illness during the 30 days preceding the initial dose in this study.
        Use of any medication including thyroid hormone replacement therapy (hormonal contraception is allowed), vitamins, herbal, and/or mineral supplements, during the 7 days preceding the initial dose.
        Refusal to abstain from food for 10 hours preceding and 4 hours following administration of the study drugs and to abstain from caffeine or xanthine entirely during each confinement.
        Consumption of alcoholic beverages within forty-eight (48) hours of initial study drug administration (Day 1) or anytime following initial study drug administration.
        History of smoking or use of nicotine products within 45 days of study drug administration or a positive urine cotinine test.
        Blood or blood products donated within 30 days prior to administration of the study drugs or anytime during the study, except as required by this protocol.
        Positive results for urine drug screen, alcohol screen at Check-in of each period, and HBsAg, HBsAb (unless immunized), anti-HCV.
        Positive Naloxone HCl challenge test.
        Presence of Gilbert's Syndrome or any known hepatobiliary abnormalities.
        The Investigator believes the subject to be unsuitable for reason(s) not specifically stated in the exclusion criteria.
    
    


Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria were randomized into the study. It was anticipated that approximately 34 subjects would be randomized, with 30 subjects targeted to complete the study. Any subject who discontinued could be replaced.
Subjects were assigned by the random allocation schedule (RAS) in a 2:1 ratio to fasted or fed state, with twenty subjects to be randomized to a fasted state and 10 subjects to be randomized to a fed state.
Check-in Procedures
On Day −1 of Period 1, subjects were admitted to the study unit and received a Naloxone HCl challenge test. The results of the test had to be negative for subjects to continue in the study. Vital signs and SPO2 were measured prior to and following the Naloxone HCl.
The following procedures were also performed for all subjects at Check-in for each period:

    
    
        Verification of inclusion/exclusion criteria, including verification of willingness to comply with caffeine or xanthine restriction criteria.
        Routine physical examination at Check-in of Period 1 only (it not performed at Screening).
        Vital signs-blood pressure, respiratory rate, and pulse rate (after being seated for approximately 5 minutes) and SPO2, including How Do You Feel?Inquiry.
        Screen for alcohol (via breathalyzer test), cotinine, and selected drugs of abuse.
        Urine pregnancy test (for all female subjects).
        Verification of medication and medical history.
        Concomitant medication monitoring and recording.
        Adverse Event monitoring and recording.
    
    


For subjects to continue their participation in the study, the results of the drug screen (including alcohol and cotinine) had to be available and negative prior to dosing. In addition, continued compliance with concomitant medication and other restrictions were verified at Check-in and throughout the study in the appropriate source documentation.
Prior to the first dose in Period 1, subjects were randomized to a treatment sequence in which test and reference treatments are received in a specified order. The treatment sequence according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) was prepared by a biostatistician who was not involved in the evaluation of the results of the study. Randomization was used in this study to enhance the validity of statistical comparisons across treatments.
The treatment sequences for this study are presented in Table 26.1:








TABLE 26.1








Treatment











Sequence
Period 1
Period 2
Period 3
Period 4





1
OC
1C
1A
1B


2
1A
OC
1B
1C


3
1B
1A
1C
OC


4
1C
1B
OC
1A









Study Procedures

The study included four study periods, each with a single dose administration. There was a washout period of seven days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were confined to the study site from the day prior to administration of the study drugs through 48 hours following administration of the study drugs, and returned to the study site for 72-hour procedures.
At each study period, the subjects were administered one of the test oxycodone formulations (10 mg) or OxyContin® 10 mg tablets (OC) with 240 mL of water, following a 10 hour overnight fast (for fasted treatments). Subjects receiving fasted treatments continued fasting from food for 4 hours following dosing. Subjects receiving fed treatments started the standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) 30 minutes prior to administration of the drug. Subjects were dosed 30 minutes after start of the meal and no food was allowed for at least 4 hours post-dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at −12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours relative to each test formulation or OxyContin® dosing.
Subjects were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of study medication. Subjects remained in an upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Clinical laboratory sampling was preceded by a fast (i.e. at least 10 hours) from food (not including water). Fasting was not required for non-dosing study days.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiration rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples for determining oxycodone plasma concentrations were obtained for each subject at predose and at 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours postdose for each period.
For each sample, 6 mL of venous blood were drawn via an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing K2EDTA anticoagulant (6 mL-draw K2EDTA VacutainerTM evacuated collection tubes). Plasma concentrations of oxycodone were quantified by a validated liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometric method.
Study Completion Procedures
The following procedures were performed in the clinic for all subjects at End of Study (Study Completion) or upon discontinuation from the study:

    
    
        Concomitant medication evaluation.
        Vital signs and SPO2, including How Do You Feel?inquiry.
        Physical examination.
        12-Lead ECU.
        Clinical laboratory evaluations (including biochemistry [fasted at least 10 hours], hematology, and urinalysis).
        Adverse event evaluations.
        Serum pregnancy test (for female subjects only).
    
    


The results of this study are shown in Tables 26.2 to 26.5.







TABLE 26.2







Mean plasma pharmacokinetic metrics data


Treatments 1A, 1B, 1C and OC (fed state)















Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
λz
tlag



(ng/mL)
(hr)
(ng · hr/mL)
(ng · hr/mL)
(hr)
(1/hr)
(hr)











Treatment 1A-fed














N
12
12
12
11
12
12
12


MEAN
11.3
5.08
122
134
4.22
0.170
0.0833


SD
5.54
2.46
55.3
42.5
0.884
0.0292
0.195


MIN
0.372
1.00
1.13
86.2
3.34
0.114
0


MEDIAN
10.7
5.00
120
121
3.94
0.177
0


MAX
20.5
10.0
221
223
6.10
0.207
0.500


GEOMEAN
8.63
NA
85.8
128
NA
NA
NA







Treatment 1B-fed














N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12


MEAN
14.2
5.25
133
134
4.37
0.164
0.0833


SD
3.36
1.48
40.2
40.3
0.947
0.0283
0.195


MIN
8.11
3.00
63.7
64.5
3.28
0.0990
0


MEDIAN
14.2
5.00
126
127
4.22
0.165
0


MAX
18.5
8.00
205
207
7.00
0.211
0.500


GEOMEAN
13.8
NA
127
128
NA
NA
NA







Treatment 1C-fed














N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12


MEAN
17.1
4.21
138
139
4.41
0.162
0.0417


SD
4.66
1.21
42.9
42.9
0.843
0.0263
0.144


MIN
11.6
1.50
91.4
92.5
3.43
0.107
0


MEDIAN
16.5
4.50
122
123
4.03
0.173
0


MAX
27.9
6.00
218
219
6.49
0.202
0.500


GEOMEAN
16.5
NA
133
134
NA
NA
NA







Treatment OC-fed














N
12
12
12
12
12
12
12


MEAN
13.2
3.17
142
143
4.83
0.146
0


SD
3.20
1.85
39.3
39.5
0.702
0.0189
0


MIN
8.85
1.00
95.2
95.9
3.93
0.105
0


MEDIAN
12.3
2.25
124
125
4.76
0.146
0


MAX
18.1
6.00
218
219
6.59
0.176
0


GEOMEAN
12.8
NA
137
138
NA
NA
NA





NA = not applicable.













TABLE 26.3







Mean plasma pharmacokinetic metrics data Treatments


1A, 1B, 1C and OC (fasted state)















Cmax
tmax
AUCt
AUCinf
t1/2z
λz
tlag



(ng/mL)
(hr)
(ng · hr/mL)
(ng · hr/mL)
(hr)
(1/hr)
(hr)











Treatment 1A-fasted














N
20
20
20
20
20
20
20


MEAN
8.84
4.60
109
111
4.66
0.156
0.0250


SD
2.25
1.90
20.1
20.3
1.26
0.0279
0.112


MIN
4.85
2.00
69.0
69.8
3.56
0.0752
0


MEDIAN
8.53
5.00
114
114
4.29
0.162
0


MAX
13.2
10.0
138
139
9.22
0.195
0.500


GEOMEAN
8.56
NA
108
109
NA
NA
NA







Treatment 1B-fasted














N
19
19
19
19
19
19
19


MEAN
9.97
4.58
115
116
4.67
0.156
0


SD
1.82
1.18
23.8
23.8
1.24
0.0309
0


MIN
6.90
2.00
75.2
76.3
3.53
0.0878
0


MEDIAN
10.0
5.00
121
122
4.35
0.159
0


MAX
14.1
6.00
152
153
7.90
0.197
0


GEOMEAN
9.81
NA
113
114
NA
NA
NA







Treatment 1C-fasted














N
22
22
22
22
22
22
22


MEAN
13.6
3.75
110
111
4.18
0.169
0.0227


SD
3.79
1.38
18.5
18.5
0.594
0.0256
0.107


MIN
8.64
1.00
70.6
71.1
2.92
0.135
0


MEDIAN
12.9
3.75
112
113
4.13
0.169
0


MAX
23.7
6.00
142
143
5.14
0.237
0.500


GEOMEAN
13.2
NA
108
109
NA
NA
NA







Treatment OC-fasted














N
19
19
19
19
19
19
19


MEAN
9.73
2.82
114
115
4.82
0.154
0


SD
1.67
0.960
26.0
26.2
1.41
0.0379
0


MIN
7.38
1.00
76.3
77.8
3.11
0.0839
0


MEDIAN
9.57
3.00
112
112
4.37
0.159
0


MAX
13.2
5.00
181
183
8.27
0.223
0


GEOMEAN
9.60
NA
112
113
NA
NA
NA





NA = not applicable.













TABLE 26.4







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics:


Bioavailability Example 7.1 to 7.3 Tablets Relative to


OxyContin ® 10 mg in the Fed State


(Population: Full Analysis)










Cmax
AUCt












LS 

LS 




Mean

Mean



Comparison
Ratio
90% 
Ratio
90% 


(Test
(test/
Confidence
(test/
Confidence


vs. Ref)
reference)a
Intervalb
reference)a
Intervalb














1A vs. OC
67.5
[47.84, 95.16]
62.6
[39.30, 99.83]


1B vs. OC
108.0
[76.59, 152.33]
92.9
[58.31, 148.14]


1C vs. OC
129.0
[91.54, 182.07]
97.0
[60.83, 154.52]





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means; Ratio of metric means for ln-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale (test = Treatment 1A, 1B, 1C; reference = Treatment OC);


b90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.













TABLE 26.5







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics:


Bioavailability Example 7.1 to 7.3 Tablets Relative to


OxyContin ® 10 mg in the Fasted State


(Population: Full Analysis)










Cmax
AUCt












LS

LS




Mean

Mean



Comparison
Ratio
90%
Ratio
90%


(Test
(test/
Confidence
(test/
Confidence


vs. Ref)
reference)a
Intervalb
reference)a
Intervalb














1A vs. OC
89.5
[82.76 , 96.89]
97.0
[92.26, 102.79]


1B vs. OC
99.0
[91.33, 107.30]
101.0
[95.42, 106.57]


1C vs. OC
133.0
[123.23, 143.86]
96.4
[91.43, 101.68]





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means; Ratio of metric means for In-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale (test = Treatment 1A, 1B, 1C; reference = Treatment OC);


b90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.






Example 27
In Example 27, oxycodone HCl tablets of Example 7.2, and Example 14.2 to 14.5 containing 10, 15, 20, 30, and 40 mg oxycodone HCl respectively were subjected to a variety of tamper resistance testing, using mechanical force and chemical extraction to evaluate their resistance to physical and chemical manipulation.
Test results are compared to control data, defined as percent Active Pharmaceutical Ingredient (API) released for intact tablets after in vitro dissolution in Simulated Gastric Fluid without enzyme (SGF) for 45 minutes. This comparator was chosen as a reference point to approximate the amount of API present in the body (after 45 min) when the product is taken as directed. Available results for the current marketed formulation, OxyContinTM, are presented for comparison as well.
Five different strength tablets (10, 15, 20, 30 and 40 mg oxycodone HCl, corresponding to Example 7.2, and Examples 14.2 to 14.5) were manufactured. All tablet strengths are about the same size and weight, therefore all testing was performed on the bracketing tablet strengths with the lowest API to excipient ratio (10 mg, Example 7.2) and the highest API to excipient ratio (40 mg, Example 14.5). In addition, level 1 testing was performed on the intermediate tablet strengths (15, 20 and 30 mg, Examples 14.2, 14.3 and 14.4) to assess the resistance to physical manipulation, and subsequent chemical extraction, when using a mortar and pestle. Further testing was not performed on these tablets as higher levels of testing employ a coffee mill which resulted in similar particle size distributions and similar amount of extracted API for the milled bracketing tablets (Example 7.2 and 14.5).
The experimental techniques used for this testing were designed to provide procedures for simulating and evaluating common methods of abuse. Four levels of tamper resistance were broadly defined to provide an approximation of the relative level of tamper resistance. Several approaches to tampering were considered; these include mechanical force (applied to damage the drug product), availability and toxicity of extraction solvents, length of extraction, and thermal treatment. Each higher level of tamper resistance represents an increase in the degree of difficulty necessary to successfully tamper with a drug product. The definitions of levels of tamper resistance, including examples of equipment and reagents, are presented in Table 27.1.







TABLE 27.1







Definitions and Examples of Testing













Degree Of
Equipment
Reagent 


Level
Definition
Difficulty
Examples
Examples





0
Able to be 
Negligible
N/A
None



directly abused






without 






preparation





1
Readily abused 
Minimal
Crushing 
water,



through a

tool
distilled



variety of means 

(hammer,
spirits



without reagent

shoe,
(vodka,



or with an 

pill
gin,



easily 

crusher, 
etc),



obtainable

etc)
vinegar,



reagent


baking 



Reagents are 


soda,



directly ingestible


cooking



and extraction 


oil



time is shorter





2
Readily abused 
Moderate
Tools 
100% 



with additional

for IV
ethanol



preparation 

preparation,
(grain



requiring some

milling
alcohol,



planning

tool
Everclear)



Reagents are

(coffee 
strong



directly 

mill,
acidic



ingestible,

blender),
and



although 

micro- 
basic 



more harmful,

wave
solutions



extraction time 

oven




is shorter, and






thermal treatment 






is applied





3
Preparation for 
Substantial
Impact mill
In addition to



abuse requires

(e.g., Fitzmill)
previously



knowledge of 


listed



drug chemistry,


solvents:



includes less 


methanol,



readily available


ether,



reagents, may 


isopropanol,



require industrial


acetone,



tools, involves 


ethyl 



complex


acetate



processes 






(e.g., two-phase






extraction)






Some reagents






are harmful and






not directly






ingestible,






extraction time






and 






temperature






are increased









Testing Results

Control Data (“Taken as Directed”) and Specification Limits

Dissolution testing on intact Example 7.2, and Example 14.2 to 14.5 tablets was performed in vitro using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C. Samples were taken at 45 minutes of dissolution and analyzed by reversed-phase high performance liquid chromatography (HPLC). The average results of a triplicate analysis are reported in Table 27.2 and compared to equivalent data for OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets.







TABLE 27.2







Control Results - % API Released at 45 minutes









% oxycodone HCl1 released at 45 minutes













Sample
Oxy-
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.


Prepara-
Contin TM
7.2
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5


tion
10 mg
(10 mg)
(15 mg)
(20 mg)
(30 mg)
(40 mg)





None (intact
34
19
20
20
18
19


tablets)





1relative to label claim






In addition, Table 27.3 contains the one hour dissolution specification limits for each of the tablets studied. This illustrates the range of acceptable drug release at one hour for all formulations tested in this study. It should be noted that the upper acceptable limit for one hour in vitro release of oxycodone HCl from OxyContin 10 mg tablets is 49%.







TABLE 27.3







Dissolution (% Released) Specification Limits










Product
1 Hr Specification Limit







Example  7.2
15-35



Example 14.2
15-35



Example 14.3
15-35



Example 14.4
15-35



Example 14.5
15-35



OxyContin TM 10 mg
29-49










Level 1 Testing

Level one testing included crushing with a mortar and pestle and simple extraction.
Level 1 Results—Crushing
After crushing in a mortar and pestle, in vitro dissolution testing was performed in triplicate for each product using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., as described above for control data. Example 7.2 tablets were not able to be crushed using a mortar and pestle and therefore release of the API was not significantly increased as compared to the control results. Although difficult, tablets of Examples 14.2 to 14.5 (15, 20, 30 and 40 mg tablets) could be broken into large pieces using a mortar and pestle producing little to no powder. This reduction in particle size resulted in higher release of the API; however, the swelling of the tablet matrix, when dissolved in SGF, provides protection against dose dumping as less than half of the API was released after 45 minutes. The OxyContinTM tablets were easily reduced to a powder using a mortar and pestle resulting in release of most of the API. FIG. 40 contains representative images of crushed tablets. Table 27.4 contains the average results for percent API released after crushing.







TABLE 27.4







Crushing Results - % API Released at 45 Minutes









% oxycodone HCl1 released at 45 min.













Sample
Oxy-
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.


Prepara-
Contin TM
7.2
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5


tion
10 mg
(10 mg)
(15 mg)
(20 mg)
(30 mg)
(40 mg)





Crushed
92
20
41
44
42
43


tablets


Control -
34
19
20
20
18
19


intact tablets


(45 min


release)





1relative to label claim






Additionally, Example 14.5 tablets could not be crushed between two spoons demonstrating that additional tools would need to be employed to crush the tablets. Conversely, the OxyContinTM tablets were easily crushed between two spoons.
Level 1 Results—Simple Extraction
Example 7.2, and Example 14.2 to 14.5 tablets were crushed in a mortar and pestle and vigorously shaken on a wrist-action shaker, over a 10° angle, for 15 minutes in various solvents at room temperature. As previously stated, Example 7.2 tablets were unaffected by crushing in a mortar and pestle and therefore extraction amounts were not increased. Example 14.2 to 14.5 tablets were crushed using a mortar and pestle before extraction. Due to the swelling of the tablet matrix in the solvents tested, the crushed tablets remained resistant to comprehensive dose dumping, whereas the OxyContinTM tablets released nearly all of the API. Table 27.5 contains the average amount of API released in each solvent.







TABLE 27.5







Simple Extraction Results - % API Released at 15 Minutes








Crushed
% oxycodone HCl1 released













Tablets in
Oxy-
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.
Ex.


Extraction
Contin TM
7.2
14.2
14.3
14.4
14.5


Solvent
(10 mg)
(10 mg)
(15 mg)
(20 mg)
(30 mg)
(40 mg)
















Water
92
8
32
30
28
51


40% EtOH
101
5
24
18
22
40


(v/v)


Vinegar
102
11
28
35
41
54


Cooking Oil
79
0
2
1
2
6


0.026M
95
6
26
25
29
50


Baking Soda


Solution


Control -
34
19
20
20
18
19


intact tablets


(45 min


release)





1relative to label claim






Level 2 Testing

Level two testing included milling, simulated intravenous (IV) preparation, thermal treatment and extraction.
Level 2 Results—Milling
Example 7.2 and Example 14.5 tablets were ground in a Cuisanart® coffee mill with stainless steel blades (model DCG-12BC) for 1 minute. The energy output of the coffee mill (1 minute) was determined to be 10.5 kJ. In triplicate, material equivalent to one dosage unit was removed and analyzed by dissolution testing using USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., as described above for the control data. After one minute, Example 7.2 and Example 14.5 tablets were milled to similar particle size distributions resulting in both tablet strengths releasing approximately half of the API. The OxyContinTM tablets were milled into a mixture of larger pieces and some powder resulting in nearly complete release of the API. Table 27.6 contains the average amount of API released from the milled tablets. As previously mentioned, the ground Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets swell and become gelatinous. This phenomenon provides protection against dose dumping. FIG. 41 contains representative images of milled tablets before and after dissolution.







TABLE 27.6







Milling Results—% API Released at 45 Minutes











% oxycodone HCl1 released












Sample 
OxyContin
Ex. 7.2
Ex. 14.5



Preparation
(10 mg)
(10 mg) 
(40 mg)







Milled tablets
93
47
52



Control - intact tablets
34
19
19



(45 min release)







1relative to label claim






Relative In Vitro Dissolution Rate

To assess the relative rate of release of the API, dissolution samples were collected every five minutes from t=0 to t=40 minutes for milled Ex 7.2 tablets (coffee mill) and crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets (mortar and pestle). The OxyContinTM tablet is more easily and effectively crushed using a mortar and pestle. Although approximately half of the API is released from milled Example 7.2 tablets over 45 minutes, it is released at a gradual rate that is characteristic of a controlled released product. Dose dumping is not observed. Conversely, dissolution of milled OxyContinTM tablets results in complete dose dumping within 10 minutes. This is illustrated in FIG. 42.
Particle Size Distribution of Milled Tablets
Milled Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets (coffee mill) and crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets (mortar and pestle) were analyzed by sieving to evaluate the particle size distribution of the milled material. The tablets were sieved for 12 minutes using vibration. The sieves used and the corresponding mesh sizes are presented in Table 27.7. As shown in the particle size distribution graphs in FIG. 43, 70-80% of the milled Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets are larger than 600 μm. The large particle size of the milled material is likely disagreeable to snorting. OxyContinTM 10 mg resulted in a much smaller particle size distribution.







TABLE 27.7







Sieve Sizes and Corresponding Mesh Size










Sieve Number
Mesh Size (μm)














30
600



40
425



60
250



80
180



120
125



200
75



325
45










Level 2 Results—Simulated Intravenous Preparation

Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets were milled in the coffee mill (as described above) and placed onto a spoon. The OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets were crushed between two spoons. Two milliliters of water were added to each spoon to extract or dissolve the drug product. The milled Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets became viscous after the water was added which resulted in a small amount (<0.3 ml) of the liquid being able to be drawn into an insulin syringe and analyzed for API content. Very little API was recovered. Approximately one milliliter containing half of the API was recovered for the crushed OxyContin 10 mg tablets. Table 27.8 contains the simulated intravenous preparation results.







TABLE 27.8







Simulated IV Results—% API Released











% oxycodone HCl1 released












Sample 
OxyContin TM
Ex. 7.2
Ex. 14.5



Preparation
(10 mg)
(10 mg)
(40 mg)







Simulated IV prep
49
 1
 4



Control - intact tablets
34
19
19



(45 min release)







1relative to label claim






Level 2 Results—Thermal Treatment

Thermal treatment was attempted in the microwave; however, testing was unsuccessful in small volumes of water. The milled Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablet material could not be contained in 10-20 ml of boiling water therefore the amount of water was increased to 100 ml. After 3 minutes at high power in an 800 Watt microwave oven (GE Model JE835), the remaining liquid was analyzed for API content. Additionally, extraction in a small amount of boiling water was assessed by adding 10 ml of boiling water to a vial containing a milled tablet. The vial was vigorously shaken for 15 minutes. As shown in Table 27.9, after applying thermal treatment the milled tablet retained controlled release properties that prevented complete dose dumping. The microwave experiment was not performed on crushed OxyContin tablets; however, comparison data from the boiling water experiment is presented.







TABLE 27.9







Thermal Treatment Results—% API Released









% oxycodone HCl1 released










Sample 
OxyContin
Ex. 7.2
Ex. 14.5


Preparation
(10 mg)
(10 mg)
(40 mg)





Milled tablets in 100 ml hot water
N/A
44
52


(microwave 3 min)





Milled tablets with 10 ml hot water 
89
58
61


(15 minutes shaken)





Control—intact tablets
34
19
19


(45 min release)





1relative to label claim






Level 2 Results—Extraction

Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets were milled in a coffee mill (as per the method described above) and subsequently shaken for 15 minutes in various solvents at mom temperature. The OxyContinTM tablets were crushed using a mortar and pestle. Table 27.10 contains the average amount of API released in each solvent. The milled tablets remained resistant to comprehensive dose dumping in a variety of solvents.







TABLE 27.10







Extraction Results—% API Released at 15 Minutes











% oxycodone HCl1 released












Milled Tablets with
OxyContin
Ex. 7.2
Ex. 14.5



Extraction Solvent
(10 mg)
(10 mg)
(40 mg)







100% EtOH
96
53
48



0.1 N HCl
97
45
51



0.2 N NaOH
16
27
17



Control—intact tablets
34
19
19



(45 min release)







1relative to label claim






Level 3 Testing

Level 3 testing included extraction for 60 minutes at Room Temperature (RT) and 50° C.
Level 3 Results—Advanced Extraction (RT, 50° C.)
Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets were milled in a coffee mill (as per the method described above) and subsequently vigorously shaken for 60 minutes in various solvents at room temperature. Additionally, the milled tablets were extracted in various solvents held at 50° C. for 60 minutes using a heated water bath. Stir bars were placed in each vial to agitate the liquid. After one hour of extraction the ground tablets retained some controlled release properties that provided protection against complete dose dumping. Extraction at elevated temperatures is not significantly more effective due to the increased solubility of the tablet matrix at higher temperatures in most of the solvents tested. In Table 27.11, amounts released for Example 7.2 and 14.5 tablets are compared to 15 minute extraction for crushed OxyContinTM 10 mg tablets.







TABLE 27.11







Advanced Extraction Results - % API Released at 60 Minutes










% Oxycodone1
% Oxycodone1


Milled
Released (RT)
Released (50° C.)













Tablets with
*Oxy-
Ex.
Ex.
*Oxy-
Ex.
Ex.


Extraction
Contin
7.2
14.5
Contin
7.2
14.5


Solvent
(10 mg)
(10 mg)
(40 mg)
10 mg
(10 mg)
(40 mg)
















40%
101
55
56
N/A
61
65


Ethanol (v/v)


100% Ethanol
96
66
61

78
67


Cooking Oil
79
2
4

7
4


0.1N HCl
97
58
62

62
69


0.2N NaOH
16
38
35

41
17


70% iso-
97
48
35

49
69


propanol (v/v)


Acetone
60
37
38

N/A
N/A


Methanol
92
71
82

72
61


Ethyl Acetate
83
25
5

39
30


Ether
78
10
2

N/A
N/A


Control -
34
19
19
34
19
19


intact tablets


(45 min


release)





1relative to label claim;


*Crushed OxyContin data at 15 min for comparison.






Example 28
In Example 28, a randomized, open-label, single-center, single-dose, two-treatment, two-period, two-way crossover study in healthy human subjects was conducted to assess the bioequivalence of Example 14.1 oxycodone HCl (10 mg) formulation relative to the commercial OxyContin® formulation (10 mg) in the fed state.
The study treatments were as follows:

    Test treatment: 1× Example 14.1 tablet (10 mg oxycodone HCl)
    Reference treatment: 1× OxyContin® 10 mg tablet


The treatments were each administered orally with 8 oz. (240 mL) water as a single dose in the fed state.
As this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Subject Selection
Screening procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
Subjects who met the inclusion criteria as described for Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to the exclusion criteria as described for Example 26, except that item 11 of the exclusion criteria for this study refers to “refusal to abstain from food for 4 hours following administration of the study drugs and to abstain from caffeine or xanthine entirely during each confinement.”
Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria were randomized into the study. It was anticipated that approximately 84 subjects would be randomized, with approximately 76 subjects targeted to complete the study.
Check-in Procedures
The check-in procedures performed on day −1 of period 1 and at check-in for each period were performed as described in Example 26. Pre-dose (Day −1, Period 1 only) laboratory samples (hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis) were collected after vital signs and SPO2 had been measured following overnight fasting (10 hours).
Prior to the first dose in Period 1, subjects were randomized to a treatment sequence according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) as described for Example 26. The treatment sequences for this study are presented in Table 28.1.








TABLE 28.1








Treatment









Sequence
Period 1
Period 2





1
l × OxyContin ® 10 mg
l × Example 14.1


2
l × Example 14.1
l × OxyContin ® 10 mg









Study Procedure

The study included two study periods, each with a single dose administration. There was a washout period of at least six days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were confined to the study site from the day prior to administration of the study drugs through 48 hours following administration of the study drugs, and subjects returned to the study site for 72-hour procedures.
At each study period, following a 10 hour overnight fast, the subjects were fed a standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) 30 minutes prior to administration of either Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin® 10 mg tablets with 240 mL of water. No food was allowed for at least 4 hours post-dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 25 mg tablets at −12, 0, and 12 hours relative to Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin® dosing.
Subjects were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin®. Subjects remained in an upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required for non-dosing study days.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiration rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples for determining oxycodone plasma concentrations were obtained for each subject at predose and at 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours postdose for each period.
For each sample, 6 mL of venous blood were drawn via an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing K2EDTA anticoagulant. Plasma concentrations of oxycodone were quantified by a validated liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometric method.
The study completion procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 28.2.







TABLE 28.2







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics:


Bioavailability Example 14.1 Formulation Relative to OxyContin ® 10


mg in the Fed State (Population: Full Analysis)











LS Meana
Test/
90%

















(Refer-
Refer-
Confidence


Metric
N
(Test)b
N
ence)b
encec
Intervald
















Cmax
79
13.9
81
13.3
105
(101.06; 108.51)


(ng/mL)


AUCt
79
138
81
145
95.7
(93.85; 97.68)


(ng*hr/mL)


AUCinf
79
139
81
146
95.6
(93.73; 97.53)


(ng*hr/mL)





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means.


bTest = Example 14.1 tablet; Reference = OxyContin ® 10 mg tablet.


cRatio of metric means for ln-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale.


d90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.






The results show that Example 14.1 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin® 10 mg tablets in the fed state.
Example 29
In Example 29, a randomized, open-label single-center, single-dose, two-treatment, two-period, two-way crossover study in healthy human subjects was conducted to assess the bioequivalence of Example 14.1 oxycodone HCl (10 mg) formulation relative to the commercial OxyContin® formulation (10 mg) in the fasted state.
The study treatments were as follows:

    Test treatment: 1× Example 14.1 tablet (10 mg oxycodone HCl)
    Reference treatment: 1× OxyContin® 10 mg tablet


The treatments were each administered orally with 8 oz. (240 mL) water as a single dose in the fasted state.
As this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Subject Selection
Screening procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
Subjects who met the inclusion criteria as described for Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to the exclusion criteria as described for Example 26.
Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria were randomized into the study. It was anticipated that approximately 84 subjects would be randomized, with approximately 76 subjects targeted to complete the study.
Check-in Procedures
The check-in procedures performed on day −1 of period 1 and at check-in for each period were performed as described in Example 26. Pre-dose (Day −1, Period 1 only) laboratory samples (hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis) were collected after vital signs and SPO2 had been measured following overnight fasting (10 hours).
Prior to the first dose in Period 1, subjects were randomized to a treatment sequence according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) as described for Example 26. The treatment sequences for this study are presented in Table 29.1.








TABLE 29.1








Treatment









Sequence
Period 1
Period 2





1
l × OxyContin ® 10 mg
l × Example 14.1


2
l × Example 14.1
l × OxyContin ® 10 mg









Study Procedures

The study included two study periods, each with a single dose administration. There was a washout period of at least six days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were confined to the study site from the day prior to administration of the study drugs through 48 hours following administration of the study drugs, and subjects returned to the study site for 72-hour procedures.
At each study period, the subjects were administered the Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin® 10 mg tablets with 240 mL of water, following a 10 hour overnight fast. Subjects continued fasting from food for at least 4 hours post-dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 25 mg tablets at −12, 0, and 12 hours relative to Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin® dosing.
Subjects were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of Example 14.1 formulation or OxyContin®. Subjects remained in an upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Clinical laboratory sampling (Day −1) was preceded by a fast (i.e. at least 10 hours) from food (not including water). Fasting was not required for non-dosing study days.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiration rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples for determining oxycodone plasma concentrations were obtained for each subject at predose and at 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours postdose for each period.
For each sample, 6 mL of venous blood were drawn via an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing K2EDTA anticoagulant. Plasma concentrations of oxycodone were quantified by a validated liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometric method.
The study completion procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 29.2.







TABLE 29.2







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics: Bioavailability


Example 14.1 Formulation Relative to OxyContin ® 10


mg in the Fasted State (Population: Full Analysis)











LS Meana
Test/
90%

















(Refer-
Refer-
Confidence


Metric
N
(Test)b
N
ence)b
encec
Intervald
















Cmax
81
9.36
81
9.15
102
(99.35, 105.42)


(ng/mL)


AUCt
81
107
81
109
98.3
(95.20, 101.48)


(ng*hr/mL)


AUCinf
81
108
81
110
98.0
(94.94, 101.19)


(ng*hr/mL)





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means.


bTest = Example 14.1 tablet; Reference = OxyContin ® 10 mg tablet.


cRatio of metric means for ln-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale.


d90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.






The results show that Example 14.1 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin® 10 mg tablets in the fasted state.
Example 30
In Example 30, a randomized, open-label, single-center, single-dose, two-treatment, two-period, two-way crossover study in healthy human subjects was conducted to assess the bioequivalence of Example 14.5 oxycodone HCl (40 mg) formulation relative to the commercial OxyContin® formulation (40 mg) in the fed state.
The study treatments were as follows:

    Test treatment: 1× Example 14.5 tablet (40 mg oxycodone HCl)
    Reference treatment: 1× OxyContin® 40 mg tablet


The treatments were each administered orally with 8 oz. (240 mL) water as a single dose in the fed state.
As this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Subject Selection
Screening procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
Subjects who met the inclusion criteria as described for Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to the exclusion criteria as described for Example 26, except that item 11 of the exclusion criteria for this study refers to “refusal to abstain from food for 4 hours following administration of the study drugs and to abstain from caffeine or xanthine entirely during each confinement.”
Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria were randomized into the study. It was anticipated that approximately 84 subjects would be randomized, with approximately 76 subjects targeted to complete the study.
Check-in Procedures
The check-in procedures performed on day −1 of period 1 and at check-in for each period were performed as described in Example 26. Pre-dose (Day −1, Period 1 only) laboratory samples (hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis) were collected after vital signs and SPO2 had been measured following fasting for a minimum of 4 hours.
Prior to the first dose in Period 1, subjects were randomized to a treatment sequence according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) as described for Example 26. The treatment sequences for this study are presented in Table 30.1.








TABLE 30.1








Treatment









Sequence
Period 1
Period 2





1
l × OxyContin ® 40 mg
l × Example 14.5


2
l × Example 14.5
l × OxyContin ® 40 mg









Study Procedures

The study included two study periods, each with a single dose administration. There was a washout period of at least six days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were confined to the study site from the day prior to administration of the study drugs through 48 hours following administration of the study drugs, and subjects returned to the study site for 72-hour procedures.
At each study period, following a 10 hour overnight fast, the subjects were fed a standard meal (FDA high-fat breakfast) 30 minutes prior to administration of either Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin®40 mg tablets with 240 mL of water. No food was allowed for at least 4 hours post-dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at −12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours relative to Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin® dosing.
Subjects were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin®. Subjects remained in an upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required for non-dosing study days.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiration rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples for determining oxycodone plasma concentrations were obtained for each subject at predose and at 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours postdose for each period.
For each sample, 6 mL of venous blood were drawn via an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing K2EDTA anticoagulant. Plasma concentrations of oxycodone were quantified by a validated liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometric method.
The study completion procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 30.2.







TABLE 30.2







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics:


Bioavailability Example 14.5 Formulation Relative to OxyContin ® 40


mg in the Fed State (Population: Full Analysis)











LS Meana
Test/
90%

















(Refer-
Refer-
Confidence


Metric
N
(Test)b
N
ence)b
encec
Intervald
















Cmax
76
59.8
80
59.9
99.9
 (95.40, 104.52)


(ng/mL)


AUCt
76
514
80
556
92.5
(90.01, 94.99)


(ng*hr/mL)


AUCinf
76
516
80
558
92.4
(90.00, 94.96)


(ng*hr/mL)





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means.


bTest = Example 14.5 tablet; Reference = OxyContin ® 40 mg tablet.


cRatio of metric means for ln-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale.


d90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.






The results show that Example 14.5 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin® 40 mg tablets in the fed state.
Example 31
In Example 31, a randomized, open-label single-center, single-dose, two-treatment, two-period, two-way crossover study in healthy human subjects was conducted to assess the bioequivalence of Example 14.5 oxycodone HCl (40 mg) formulation relative to the commercial OxyContin® formulation (40 mg) in the fasted state.
The study treatments were as follows:

    Test treatment: 1× Example 14.5 tablet (40 mg oxycodone HCl)
    Reference treatment: 1× OxyContin® 40 mg tablet


The treatments were each administered orally with 8 oz. (240 mL) water as a single dose in the fasted state.
As this study was conducted in healthy human subjects, the opioid antagonist naltrexone hydrochloride was administered to minimize opioid-related adverse events.
Subject Selection
Screening procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
Subjects who met the inclusion criteria as described for Example 26 were included in the study. Potential subjects were excluded from the study according to the exclusion criteria as described for Example 26.
Subjects meeting all the inclusion criteria and none of the exclusion criteria were randomized into the study. It was anticipated that approximately 84 subjects would be randomized, with approximately 76 subjects targeted to complete the study.
Check-in Procedures
The check-in procedures performed on day −1 of period 1 and at check-in for each period were performed as described in Example 26. Pre-dose (Day −1, Period 1 only) laboratory samples (hematology, biochemistry, and urinalysis) were collected after vital signs and SPO2 had been measured following fasting for a minimum of 4 hours.
Prior to the first dose in Period 1, subjects were randomized to a treatment sequence according to the random allocation schedule (RAS) as described for Example 26. The treatment sequences for this study are presented in Table 31.1.








TABLE 31.1








Treatment









Sequence
Period 1
Period 2





1
l × OxyContin ® 40 mg
l × Example 14.5


2
l × Example 14.5
l × OxyContin ® 40 mg









Study Procedures

The study included two study periods, each with a single dose administration. There was a washout period of at least six days between dose administrations in each study period. During each period, subjects were confined to the study site from the day prior to administration of the study drugs through 48 hours following administration of the study drugs, and subjects returned to the study site for 72-hour procedures.
At each study period, the subjects were administered the Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin® 40 mg tablets with 240 mL of water, following a 10 hour overnight fast. Subjects continued fasting from food for at least 4 hours post-dose.
Subjects received naltrexone HCl 50 mg tablets at −12, 0, 12, 24, and 36 hours relative to Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin® dosing.
Subjects were standing or in an upright sitting position while receiving their dose of Example 14.5 formulation or OxyContin®. Subjects remained in an upright position for a minimum of 4 hours.
Fasting was not required for non-dosing study days.
During the study, adverse events and concomitant medications were recorded, and vital signs (including blood pressure, body temperature, pulse rate, and respiration rate) and SPO2 were monitored.
Blood samples for determining oxycodone plasma concentrations were obtained for each subject at predose and at 0.5, 1, 1.5, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 4.5, 5, 6, 8, 10, 12, 16, 24, 28, 32, 36, 48, and 72 hours postdose for each period.
For each sample, 6 mL of venous blood were drawn via an indwelling catheter and/or direct venipuncture into tubes containing K2EDTA anticoagulant. Plasma concentrations of oxycodone were quantified by a validated liquid chromatography tandem mass spectrometric method.
The study completion procedures were performed as described for Example 26.
The results of this study are shown in Table 31.2.







TABLE 31.2







Statistical Results of Oxycodone Pharmacokinetic Metrics: Bioavailability


Example 14.5 Formulation Relative to OxyContin ® 40


mg in the Fasted State (Population: Full Analysis)











LS Meana
Test/
90%

















(Refer-
Refer-
Confidence


Metric
N
(Test)b
N
ence)b
encec
Intervald
















Cmax
85
46.1
83
47.7
96.6
 (92.80, 100.56)


(ng/mL)


AUCt
85
442
83
463
95.5
(92.93, 98.18)


(ng*hr/mL)


AUCinf
85
444
82
468
94.8
(92.42, 97.24)


(ng*hr/mL)





aLeast squares mean from ANOVA. Natural log (ln) metric means calculated by transforming the ln means back to the linear scale, i.e., geometric means.


bTest = Example 14.5 tablet; Reference = OxyContin ® 40 mg tablet.


cRatio of metric means for ln-transformed metric (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed ratio transformed back to linear scale.


d90% confidence interval for ratio of metric means (expressed as a percent). Ln-transformed confidence limits transformed back to linear scale.






The results show that Example 14.5 tablets are bioequivalent to OxyContin® 40 mg tablets in the fasted state.
The present invention is not to be limited in scope by the specific embodiments disclosed in the examples which are intended as illustrations of a few aspects of the invention and any embodiments that are functionally equivalent are within the scope of this invention. Indeed, various modifications of the invention in addition to those shown and described herein will become apparent to those skilled in the art and are intended to fall within the scope of the appended claims.
A number of references have been cited, the entire disclosures of which are incorporated herein by reference for all purposes.

## Claims

1. A cured shaped pharmaceutical tablet comprising:
(1) at least a first compression shaped and then air cured matrix, wherein said curing is without compression, by heated air having a temperature of at least about 62° C. for a duration of at least about 5 minutes, said matrix comprising oxycodone or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with at least one high molecular weight polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight selected from the group consisting of 4,000,000, 7,000,000, and a combination thereof, and optionally further comprising at least one low molecular weight polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000;
(2) optionally a second air cured matrix comprising oxycodone or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof in combination with at least one low molecular weight polyethylene oxide having, based on rheological measurements, an approximate molecular weight of less than 1,000,000; and
(3) optionally a coating,

wherein, in said tablet:
(i) said oxycodone or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is provided in a dose selected from the group consisting of 10 mg, 15 mg, 20 mg, and 30 mg;
the total combined weight of said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide, if present, and said high molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 79% by weight of the total weight of said tablet, excluding the weight of any coatings; and
said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide, if present, is at least 10% by weight of the total weight of said tablet, excluding the weight of any coatings; or
(ii) said oxycodone or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is provided in a dose selected from the group consisting of 40 mg, 60 mg, and 80 mg;
the total combined weight of said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide, if present, and said high molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 65% by weight of the total weight of said tablet, excluding the weight of any coatings; and
said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide, if present, is at least 10% by weight of the total weight of said tablet, excluding the weight of any coatings; and
said tablet provides a dosage form for twice-daily extended release administration of oxycodone or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.

2. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein said oxycodone or pharmaceutical salt thereof comprises at least 5% by weight, based upon the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

3. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein each shaped and cured matrix has been cured by heated air having a temperature of about 62° C. to about 90° C. for a duration of about 15 minutes to about 10 hours, and then is subsequently cooled.

4. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 3, wherein said heated air temperature is from about 65° C. to about 90° C., said duration is about 15 minutes to about 8 hours, and said cooling comprises exposure to an air temperature of less than about 62° C.

5. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein said shaped tablet is coated at least one of before or after being cured.

6. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 4, wherein one or both of said first matrix and second matrix further comprise a coating.

7. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein, said second matrix is not present, said oxycodone or pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof is provided in a dose selected from 10 mg, 15 mg, 20 mg, and 30 mg, and the total combined weight of said high and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 79% by weight of the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

8. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein, said second matrix is not present, the dosage amount of oxycodone is selected from 40 mg, 60 mg, and 80 mg, and the total combined weight of said high and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 65% by weight of the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

9. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 7, wherein said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is not present.

10. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 8, wherein said low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is not present.

11. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 5, wherein the total combined weight of said high and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 80% by weight, based upon the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

12. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 5, wherein the total combined weight of said high and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 85% by weight, based upon the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

13. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 5, wherein the total combined weight of said high and low molecular weight polyethylene oxide is at least 90% by weight, based upon the total weight of said uncoated tablet.

14. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 5, wherein said tablet further comprises magnesium stearate.

15. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 14, wherein said tablet further comprises butylated hydroxytoluene.

16. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 14, wherein said tablet further comprises at least one of lactose, microcrystalline cellulose and hydroxypropyl cellulose.

17. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein said tablet, when subjected to an indentation test, has at least one of (i) a cracking force of at least 110 N; and (ii) a penetration depth to crack distance of at least 1.0 mm.

18. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1, wherein said tablet can be flattened to a thickness that is no more than about 60% of the initial tablet thickness without breaking; and said flattened tablet swells upon exposure to water or ethanol.

19. A cured shaped tablet according to claim 1, wherein, after a plurality of at least 100 of the same tablets are stored at 40° C. and 75% relative humidity for at least 3 months, a set of at least ten of said stored tablets, on average, when measured in a USP Apparatus 1 (basket) at 100 rpm in 900 ml simulated gastric fluid without enzymes (SGF) at 37° C., in the absence of an added stabilizer, release an amount of said oxycodone or pharmaceutical salt thereof, after 1 hour, 4 hours, and 12 hours, that deviates from an initial dosage amount of said oxycodone or pharmaceutical salt thereof by no more than about 10% points.

20. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 3, wherein said air temperature during curing exhibits a plateau profile.

21. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 4, wherein said air temperature during curing exhibits a plateau profile.

22. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 3, wherein said air temperature during curing exhibits a parabolic or triangular profile.

23. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 4, wherein said air temperature during curing exhibits a parabolic or triangular profile.

24. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 3, wherein curing is by convection and said air temperature is measured as a mean exhaust temperature of a convection curing device.

25. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 3, wherein curing is by convection at atmospheric pressure and said air temperature is measured as a mean exhaust temperature of a convection curing device.

26. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 4, wherein curing is by convection at atmospheric pressure and said air temperature is measured as a mean exhaust temperature of a convection curing device.

27. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 18, wherein said tablet, when subjected to an indentation test, has at least one of (i) a cracking force of at least 110 N; and (ii) a penetration depth to crack distance of at least 1.0 mm.

28. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 1 wherein said cured shaped tablet has a density that is at least about 1% lower than the density of said shaped tablet prior to curing.

29. A cured shaped tablet as defined in claim 4 wherein said cured shaped tablet has a density that is at least about 1% lower than the density of said shaped tablet prior to curing.